Sie sind auf Seite 1von 384

AN5006-20

Small-Sized Integrated Access


Device

GPON Configuration Guide


Version: C/1

Code: MN000001808

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

September 2015
Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.


We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China


Zip code: 430073
Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)
+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax: +86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.


(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be


reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface

Related Documentation
Document Description

Introduces the AN5006-20’s network location, functional


AN5006-20 Small-Sized
features, hardware structure, application model, equipment
Integrated Access Device
configuration, network management system and technical
Product Description
specifications.

Introduces the appearance, structure, functions, technical


AN5006-20 Small-Sized
specifications, and operation of the AN5006-20’s cabinet,
Integrated Access Device
PDP, subrack, cards, cables and wires, so as to facilitate
Hardware Description
users’ mastery of the hardware features of the equipment.

Introduces the overall installation and acceptance


inspection procedures from unpacking inspection to power-
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
on test after the AN5006-20 is delivered to the construction
Integrated Access Device
site, and provides reference information (e.g. safety
Installation Guide
principles and wiring scheme of a variety of interfaces) to
guide users to install the equipment.

AN5006-20 Small-Sized Introduces how to install the AN5006-20 and how to


Integrated Access Device Quick connect and lay out wires and cables for it using
Installation Guide illustrations.
Introduces the method for configuring the MSAN services
supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device MSAN
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
Configuration Guide
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.

I
Document Description

Introduces the method for configuring the EPON services


supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device EPON
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
Configuration Guide
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.

Introduces the method for configuring the GPON services


supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
Integrated Access Device GPON
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
Configuration Guide
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.

II
Version
Version Description

A Initial version.
Corresponds to V3.1 of the AN5006-20.
B The corresponding UNM2000 version is
V1.0R1 Build13.08.01.02.
Adds the content on voice service configuration for the
C
BRIA card.

Intended Readers

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Planning and designing engineers

u Commissioning engineers

u Operation and maintenance engineers

To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:

u xDSL access principle

u Ethernet switching technology

u Computer network technology

u Internet Protocol

u V5 Protocol

u PON technology

III
Conventions

Terminology Conventions

Terminology Convention
FiberHome AN5006-20 Small-sized Integrated Access
AN5006-20
Device
FiberHome UNM2000 Network Convergence Management
UNM2000
System

MCU-EPON Manage Control Card (1×EPON)

MCU-GPON Manage Control Card (1×GPON)

MCU-EPON2 Manage Control Card (2×EPON)

MCU-GPON2 Manage Control Card (2×GPON)

MCUA Manage Control Card (4×E1+2×GE)

MCUB Manage Control Card (2×GE)

MCUC Manage Control Card (1×10G EPON)

MCUD Manage Control Card (1×XG-PON)

AD32 32 Lines ADSL2+ Card


AD64 64 Lines ADSL2+ Card
CASA 32 Ports ADSL2+ and POTS Combo Board
VD32 Very-high-bit-rate Digital Subscriber Loop 32

POTS32 32 Ports POTS Card


POTS 64 Ports POTS Card
BRIA 8 Port BRI Card
HD32A 32-port SHDSL Interfacing Card (ATM mode)

HDT8A High Bit Rate Digital TDM 8A (TDM mode)

HDT8B High Bit Rate Digital TDM 8B

PWRB Power Card (Type B)

FANB Fan Unit


HCU-20 Environment monitoring device

IV
Symbol Conventions

Symbol Convention Description

Note Important features or operation guide.

Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic


Caution
interruption or loss.

Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.

➔ Jump Jumps to another step.

Cascading
→ Connects multi-level menu options.
menu
Bidirectional
↔ The service signal is bidirectional.
service
Unidirectional
→ The service signal is unidirectional.
service

V
Contents

Preface...................................................................................................................I

Related Documentation ...................................................................................I

Version ..........................................................................................................III

Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III

Conventions ................................................................................................. IV

1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel............................................1

1.1 Logging into the Console ..................................................................2

1.1.1 First-time Login to the Console............................................2


1.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console........................................6

1.2 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel..............................7

1.2.1 Configuration Rules ............................................................7


1.2.2 Network Diagram ................................................................8
1.2.3 Planning Data .....................................................................9
1.2.4 Configuration Flow............................................................12
1.2.5 Authenticating and Authorizing the ONU ...........................13
1.2.6 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End............14
1.2.7 Adding ports to the VLAN..................................................15
1.2.8 Configuring the ONU Management VLAN..........................16
1.2.9 Adding Static Routing .......................................................17
1.2.10 Configuring Bandwidth of Various Services .......................17
1.2.11 Configuration Result .........................................................18

1.3 Logging into the UNM2000..............................................................18

2 Adding Equipment ........................................................................................21

2.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................................22

2.2 Configuration Flow..........................................................................22

2.3 Creating the Logical Domain ...........................................................23

2.4 Creating the Access NE ..................................................................25

2.5 Adding Cards..................................................................................27

2.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically ..............................................27


2.5.2 Adding Cards Manually .....................................................28

2.6 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address ................................30

2.7 Configuring the SNMP Time System ...............................................31

2.8 Synchronizing Time ........................................................................32

2.9 Saving the Configuration Data to Flash............................................33

3 Configuring Voice Services ...........................................................................35

3.1 Common Configuration ...................................................................36

3.1.1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End............36


3.1.2 Adding ports to the VLAN..................................................36

3.2 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - H.248 ........................37

3.2.1 Configuration Rules ..........................................................38


3.2.2 Network Diagram ..............................................................38
3.2.3 Planning Data ...................................................................39
3.2.4 Configuration Flow............................................................45
3.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters .............................46
3.2.6 Enabling the POTS Port....................................................47
3.2.7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ................................49
3.2.8 Configuring the Voice VLAN..............................................50
3.2.9 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform
Parameters.......................................................................51
3.2.10 Configuring the Voice IP Address ......................................52
3.2.11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters .................................52
3.2.12 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile ...............................53
3.2.13 Configuring the Voice Port.................................................54
3.2.14 Configuration End .............................................................55
3.2.15 Checking the Voice Equipment Status ...............................55
3.2.16 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status .................................56
3.2.17 Checking the DSP Channel Status....................................56
3.2.18 Checking the NGN User Port Status..................................57

3.3 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - SIP............................58

3.3.1 Configuration Rules ..........................................................59


3.3.2 Network Diagram ..............................................................59
3.3.3 Planning Data ...................................................................60
3.3.4 Configuration Flow............................................................67
3.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters .............................68
3.3.6 Enabling the POTS Port....................................................69
3.3.7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ................................71
3.3.8 Configuring the Voice VLAN..............................................72
3.3.9 Configuring the SIP Server................................................73
3.3.10 Configuring the Voice IP Address ......................................74
3.3.11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters .................................74
3.3.12 Configuring the SIP Digitmap ............................................75
3.3.13 Configuring the Voice Port.................................................76
3.3.14 Configuration End .............................................................77
3.3.15 Checking the Voice Equipment Status ...............................77
3.3.16 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status .................................78
3.3.17 Checking the DSP Channel Status....................................79
3.3.18 Checking the NGN User Port Status..................................79

3.4 Common Configuration ...................................................................81

3.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters...........................81


3.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer ..............................................82
3.4.3 Configuring the DSP Profile ..............................................82
3.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters .............................................83
3.4.5 Configuring the POS Telephone Number ...........................84
3.4.6 Configuring the IPT Number..............................................84
3.4.7 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone..........85
3.4.8 2833 Configuration ...........................................................86

3.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration.....................................................86

3.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication ..............................87


3.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing
Parameters.......................................................................87
3.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode .............................88

3.6 SIP Configuration............................................................................89

3.6.1 SIP Advanced Configuration .............................................89


3.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile .................................90

3.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ...............................................90

3.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User .......................................91

3.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information ..........................................92

3.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet .......92


3.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ...............................92
3.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port......93
3.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information........................94

4 Configuring Data Services ............................................................................96

4.1 Common Configuration ...................................................................97

4.1.1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End............97


4.1.2 Adding a Port to the VLAN ................................................98

4.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent


Mode ..............................................................................................98

4.2.1 Configuration Rules ..........................................................99


4.2.2 Network Diagram ..............................................................99
4.2.3 Planning Data .................................................................100
4.2.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................106
4.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ...........................108
4.2.6 Enabling the ADSL Port ..................................................108
4.2.7 Enabling the Port PVC .................................................... 110
4.2.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................. 112
4.2.9 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile ................................... 112
4.2.10 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile................... 113
4.2.11 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile ........................ 115
4.2.12 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ............... 115
4.2.13 Configuring the PVC Profile ............................................ 116
4.2.14 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile ............................ 117
4.2.15 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................. 119
4.2.16 Configuration Result .......................................................122

4.3 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode .......122

4.3.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................122


4.3.2 Network Diagram ............................................................123
4.3.3 Planning Data .................................................................124
4.3.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................131
4.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ...........................133
4.3.6 Enabling the ADSL Port ..................................................133
4.3.7 Enabling the Port PVC ....................................................135
4.3.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ..............................136
4.3.9 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile ...................................137
4.3.10 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile...................137
4.3.11 Configuring the PVC Profile ............................................139
4.3.12 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile ............................140
4.3.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile ........................142
4.3.14 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ...............142
4.3.15 Configuring the Port Service VLAN..................................143
4.3.16 Configuration Result .......................................................147

4.4 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ............................................................................................147

4.4.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................148


4.4.2 Network Diagram ............................................................148
4.4.3 Planning Data .................................................................149
4.4.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................156
4.4.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ...........................158
4.4.6 Enabling the VDSL Ports ................................................158
4.4.7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ..............................160
4.4.8 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile..........................160
4.4.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile .........161
4.4.10 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile ..............................162
4.4.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile..............163
4.4.12 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile ........................164
4.4.13 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ...............165
4.4.14 Configuring the Port Service VLAN..................................166
4.4.15 Configuration Result .......................................................170

4.5 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ............................................................................................170

4.5.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................170


4.5.2 Network Diagram ............................................................171
4.5.3 Planning Data .................................................................172
4.5.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................179
4.5.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ...........................181
4.5.6 Enabling the VDSL Ports ................................................181
4.5.7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ..............................182
4.5.8 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile..........................182
4.5.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile .........183
4.5.10 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile ..............................184
4.5.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile..............185
4.5.12 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile ........................186
4.5.13 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ...............187
4.5.14 Configuring the Port Service VLAN..................................188
4.5.15 Configuration Result .......................................................189

5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service...............................................................190

5.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM .......191

5.1.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................191


5.1.2 Network Diagram ............................................................191
5.1.3 Planning Data .................................................................192
5.1.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................198
5.1.5 Configuring the uplink port attributes ...............................200
5.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port.................................................200
5.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC ....................................................202
5.1.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ..............................204
5.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile..................................204
5.1.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile..............205
5.1.11 Configuring the PVC Profile ............................................207
5.1.12 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile .........................208
5.1.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile ........................210
5.1.14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ............210
5.1.15 Configuring Parameters of the SHDSL Port Bound Group212
5.1.16 Configuring the Port Service VLAN..................................213
5.1.17 Configuration Result .......................................................216

5.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM (Local


Mode)...........................................................................................216

5.2.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................216


5.2.2 Network Diagram ............................................................217
5.2.3 Planning Data .................................................................217
5.2.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................219
5.2.5 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card ......................220
5.2.6 Configuring E1 Data........................................................220
5.2.7 Configuring Clock ...........................................................221
5.2.8 Enabling the SHDSL Port................................................222
5.2.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile..................................224
5.2.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile..............224
5.2.11 Configuration Result .......................................................226

5.3 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service - SHDSL Circuit


Emulation Service Based on TDM .................................................226
5.3.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................226
5.3.2 Network Diagram ............................................................227
5.3.3 Planning Data .................................................................227
5.3.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................231
5.3.5 Configuring the SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service on the
OLT Based on TDM ........................................................231
5.3.6 Configuring the Circuit Emulation Service Based on TDM in
the AN5006-20 ...............................................................233
5.3.7 Configuration Result .......................................................240

5.4 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service - Circuit Emulation Service Based


on E1............................................................................................240

5.4.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................240


5.4.2 Network Diagram ............................................................241
5.4.3 Planning Data .................................................................241
5.4.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................243
5.4.5 Configuring the Circuit Emulation Service Based on E1 in the
OLT ................................................................................244
5.4.6 Configuring the Circuit Emulation Service on the AN5006-20
Based on E1...................................................................244
5.4.7 Configuration Result .......................................................246

6 Configuring the Multicast Service ................................................................247

6.1 Common Configuration .................................................................248

6.1.1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End..........248


6.1.2 Adding a Port to the VLAN ..............................................248
6.1.3 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode................................249
6.1.4 Configuring OLT Multicast Default VLAN .........................250

6.2 Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the
Proxy Mode ..................................................................................250

6.2.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................251


6.2.2 Network Diagram ............................................................251
6.2.3 Planning Data .................................................................252
6.2.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................254
6.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ...........................254
6.2.6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression...255
6.2.7 Enabling the ADSL Port ..................................................255
6.2.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ..............................257
6.2.9 Configuring the Multicast Mode .......................................258
6.2.10 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address .....................259
6.2.11 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN.................................259
6.2.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN..................................260
6.2.13 Configuration Result .......................................................264

6.3 Example of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the
Controllable Mode.........................................................................267

6.3.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................267


6.3.2 Network Diagram ............................................................268
6.3.3 Planning Data .................................................................269
6.3.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................272
6.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters ...........................274
6.3.6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression...274
6.3.7 Enabling the VDSL Ports ................................................274
6.3.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ..............................275
6.3.9 Configuring the Multicast Mode .......................................276
6.3.10 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address .....................277
6.3.11 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN ...........................278
6.3.12 Configuring the Multicast Profile ......................................278
6.3.13 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters .........................279
6.3.14 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters ............................280
6.3.15 Configuring the Port Service VLAN..................................281
6.3.16 Configuration Result .......................................................285

7 Card Software Upgrade ..............................................................................289

7.1 Precautions ..................................................................................290

7.2 Upgrading the Management Control Card .....................................290

7.2.1 Upgrade Rules................................................................290


7.2.2 Planning Data .................................................................291
7.2.3 Upgrade Flow .................................................................292
7.2.4 Saving Current Configuration to Flash .............................293
7.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File........................294
7.2.6 Backing up the System Software.....................................294
7.2.7 Upgrading the Management Control Card Software .........295
7.2.8 Resetting the Management Control Card.........................295
7.2.9 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control
Card ...............................................................................296
7.3 Upgrading the Line Card ...............................................................296

7.3.1 Upgrade Rules................................................................297


7.3.2 Planning Data .................................................................297
7.3.3 Upgrade Flow .................................................................298
7.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software..................298
7.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card..................................299
7.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface
Card ...............................................................................299

8 Configuring Link Aggregation ......................................................................301

8.1 Example of Configuring the Manual Aggregation Mode..................302

8.1.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................302


8.1.2 Network Diagram ............................................................302
8.1.3 Planning Data .................................................................303
8.1.4 Configuration Flow..........................................................305
8.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control
Card ...............................................................................305
8.1.6 Configuring the Aggregation Mode ..................................306
8.1.7 Configuring the Trunking Port..........................................307
8.1.8 Configuration Result .......................................................307

8.2 Configuration Example of Static LACP Aggregation Mode..............307

8.2.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................308


8.2.2 Network Diagram ............................................................308
8.2.3 Planning Data .................................................................309
8.2.4 Configuration Flow.......................................................... 311
8.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control
Card ............................................................................... 311
8.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters .............................312
8.2.7 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters ...........................312
8.2.8 Configuring the Aggregation Mode ..................................313
8.2.9 Configuring the Aggregation Ports...................................314
8.2.10 Configuration Result .......................................................314

9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring.....................................315

9.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring..............................................316

9.1.1 Configuration Rules ........................................................316


9.1.2 Planning Data .................................................................318
9.1.3 Configuration Flow..........................................................321
9.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile ....................................321
9.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile ..........................................322
9.1.6 Configuration End ...........................................................323

9.2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters .....................323

9.3 Configuring the Charging Mode.....................................................325

9.4 Resetting the HCU-20 Card ..........................................................326

9.5 Enabling the Rectifier Module........................................................327

9.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card....................327

9.7 Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card .................................328

9.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card ..............................329

10 Test Function ..............................................................................................330

10.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test .........................................................331

10.1.1 Test Rules ......................................................................331


10.1.2 Signal Flow.....................................................................331
10.1.3 Test Procedure ...............................................................332
10.1.4 Configuring the Subscriber Internal Line Test...................332
10.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ...........333
10.1.6 Test Completed...............................................................333

10.2 Subscriber External Line Test........................................................334

10.2.1 Test Rules ......................................................................334


10.2.2 Signal Flow.....................................................................334
10.2.3 Test Procedure ...............................................................335
10.2.4 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test .................335
10.2.5 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result ..........336
10.2.6 Test Completed...............................................................337

10.3 Ping Test ......................................................................................338

10.3.1 Test Purpose ..................................................................338


10.3.2 Ping Test ........................................................................338
10.3.3 Viewing the Test Result...................................................340

Appendix A FTP Operation Guide ..............................................................342

A.1 Function Overview ........................................................................342

A.2 Procedure.....................................................................................342
Figures

Figure 1-1 The UNM2000 Network Diagram.......................................................8


Figure 1-2 Configuration Flow of the UNM2000 Management Channel .............12
Figure 1-3 Configuring the PON Port Authentication Mode ...............................13
Figure 1-4 The Get Unauthorized ONU Dialog Box - Based on Physical
Identifier .........................................................................................14
Figure 1-5 Automatic Authorization Succeeded - Based on Physical Identifier ..14
Figure 1-6 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End..........................15
Figure 1-7 Adding a Port into the VLAN............................................................16
Figure 1-8 Configuring the Management VLAN for an ONU ..............................16
Figure 1-9 Adding Static Routing .....................................................................17
Figure 1-10 Configuring Bandwidth of the Integrated Service .............................18
Figure 2-1 The Flow of Adding Device .............................................................23
Figure 2-2 Creating the Logical Domain ...........................................................24
Figure 2-3 Logical Domain Creation Completed ...............................................25
Figure 2-4 Creating the Access NE ..................................................................26
Figure 2-5 The Access NE Creation Completed ...............................................27
Figure 2-6 Result of Physical Configuration Detection ......................................28
Figure 2-7 The Subrack View...........................................................................28
Figure 2-8 The Subrack View (No Card Added)................................................29
Figure 2-9 Adding Cards Manually ...................................................................30
Figure 2-10 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address ................................31
Figure 2-11 Configuring the SNMP Time System ...............................................32
Figure 2-12 Synchronizing System Time ............................................................33
Figure 2-13 Saving Current Configuration to Flash .............................................34
Figure 3-1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End..........................36
Figure 3-2 Adding a Port into the VLAN............................................................37
Figure 3-3 Network Diagram of the H.248 Voice Service...................................38
Figure 3-4 Flow Chart of the H.248 Voice Service.............................................46
Figure 3-5 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner ...................................................48
Figure 3-6 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed) ..............................................49
Figure 3-7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ..............................................50
Figure 3-8 Configuring the Voice VLAN............................................................51
Figure 3-9 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters .........51
Figure 3-10 Configuring the Voice IP Address ....................................................52
Figure 3-11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ...............................................53
Figure 3-12 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile .............................................54
Figure 3-13 Configuring the Voice Port...............................................................54
Figure 3-14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status .............................................55
Figure 3-15 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status ...............................................56
Figure 3-16 Checking the DSP Channel Status..................................................57
Figure 3-17 Checking the NGN User Port Status................................................58
Figure 3-18 Network Diagram of the SIP Voice Service ......................................60
Figure 3-19 Flow Chart of the SIP Voice Service ................................................68
Figure 3-20 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner ...................................................70
Figure 3-21 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed) ..............................................71
Figure 3-22 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ..............................................72
Figure 3-23 Configuring the Voice VLAN............................................................73
Figure 3-24 Configuring the SIP Server..............................................................74
Figure 3-25 Configuring the Voice IP Address ....................................................74
Figure 3-26 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ...............................................75
Figure 3-27 Configuring the SIP Digitmap ..........................................................76
Figure 3-28 Configuring the Voice Port...............................................................77
Figure 3-29 Checking the Voice Equipment Status .............................................78
Figure 3-30 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status ...............................................78
Figure 3-31 Checking the DSP Channel Status..................................................79
Figure 3-32 Checking the NGN User Port Status................................................80
Figure 3-33 Configuring POTS Common Parameters.........................................81
Figure 3-34 Configuring the Voice Timer ............................................................82
Figure 3-35 Configuring the DSP Profile ............................................................83
Figure 3-36 Configuring Fax Parameters ...........................................................83
Figure 3-37 Configuring the POS Telephone Number .........................................84
Figure 3-38 Configuring the IPT Number............................................................85
Figure 3-39 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone........................86
Figure 3-40 Configuring 2833 ............................................................................86
Figure 3-41 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication ............................................87
Figure 3-42 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters .........88
Figure 3-43 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ...........................................88
Figure 3-44 SIP Advanced Configuration ...........................................................89
Figure 3-45 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ...............................................90
Figure 3-46 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ...............................................91
Figure 3-47 Registering / Unregistering the NGN Users......................................91
Figure 3-48 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet .....................92
Figure 3-49 Viewing the Call Statistics Information .............................................93
Figure 3-50 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port....................94
Figure 3-51 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information......................................95
Figure 4-1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End..........................97
Figure 4-2 Adding a Port into the VLAN............................................................98
Figure 4-3 Network Diagram of the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode.......................................................................100
Figure 4-4 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent
Mode ............................................................................................107
Figure 4-5 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Mode ............................................................................................109
Figure 4-6 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)...................................................109
Figure 4-7 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Mode................................................... 111
Figure 4-8 Port PVC Enabled for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Mode . 111
Figure 4-9 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Mode......................................................................... 112
Figure 4-10 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ................................................... 113
Figure 4-11 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner ....................... 114
Figure 4-12 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in
the Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).......................... 114
Figure 4-13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ................................................... 115
Figure 4-14 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service
in the Transparent Transmission Mode .......................................... 116
Figure 4-15 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode....................................................................... 117
Figure 4-16 Binding the ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Mode......................................................................... 118
Figure 4-17 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) ............................... 118
Figure 4-18 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ................................................... 119
Figure 4-19 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data.................120
Figure 4-20 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode .............................121
Figure 4-21 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode .............................122
Figure 4-22 Network Diagram of the ADSL Data Service in the Tagged Mode...123
Figure 4-23 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode .........132
Figure 4-24 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode ....134
Figure 4-25 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
(Completed)..................................................................................134
Figure 4-26 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner in the Tag
Mode ............................................................................................135
Figure 4-27 The Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ............................................................................................136
Figure 4-28 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ............................................................................................137
Figure 4-29 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ............................................................................................137
Figure 4-30 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner .......................138
Figure 4-31 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in
the Tag Mode (Completed)............................................................139
Figure 4-32 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode 140
Figure 4-33 Binding the ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode .....................................................................................141
Figure 4-34 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode (Completed)..................................................................141
Figure 4-35 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode .....................................................................................142
Figure 4-36 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service
in the Tag Mode ............................................................................143
Figure 4-37 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode ............................................................................................144
Figure 4-38 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data.................145
Figure 4-39 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Tag Mode................................................................146
Figure 4-40 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Tag Mode.147
Figure 4-41 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ............................................................................................149
Figure 4-42 Flow of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ............................................................................................157
Figure 4-43 Enabling VDSL Ports for VDSL Services in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ............................................................................................159
Figure 4-44 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode (Completed) ........................................................................159
Figure 4-45 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode ..........................................................................160
Figure 4-46 Configuring the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode ..........................................................................161
Figure 4-47 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in
the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed)...........................................162
Figure 4-48 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode ..........................................................................163
Figure 4-49 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service
in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed) .......................................164
Figure 4-50 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the
1:1 Translation Mode ....................................................................165
Figure 4-51 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service
in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed) .......................................166
Figure 4-52 Selecting the Ports in the 1:1 Translation Mode .............................167
Figure 4-53 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data.................167
Figure 4-54 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the 1:1
Translation Mode ..........................................................................169
Figure 4-55 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the 1:1
Translation Mode ..........................................................................170
Figure 4-56 Network Diagram of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ............................................................................................171
Figure 4-57 Flow of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode ............................................................................................180
Figure 4-58 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode (Completed) ........................................................................181
Figure 4-59 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode ..........................................................................182
Figure 4-60 Configuring the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode....................................................................183
Figure 4-61 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL
Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed) ..........................184
Figure 4-62 Configuring the VDSL Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode ..........................................................................185
Figure 4-63 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service
in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed).......................................186
Figure 4-64 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode....................................................................187
Figure 4-65 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service
in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed).......................................188
Figure 4-66 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the N:1
Translation Mode ..........................................................................189
Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode ............................................................................................192
Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode.199
Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode.........................................................................200
Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Ports for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode.........................................................................201
Figure 5-5 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode (Completed).....................................................202
Figure 5-6 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner - G.SHDSL
Service Configuration....................................................................203
Figure 5-7 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode
(Completed)..................................................................................203
Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode.................................................................204
Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode.................................................................205
Figure 5-10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode ...........................................206
Figure 5-11 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Completed) .......................206
Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode.........................................................................207
Figure 5-13 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode......................................209
Figure 5-14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)..................209
Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode......................................210
Figure 5-16 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G. SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ..................... 211
Figure 5-17 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)..212
Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.
SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode .........212
Figure 5-19 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ...........................................213
Figure 5-20 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data.................214
Figure 5-21 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode .....................215
Figure 5-22 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode ...........................................216
Figure 5-23 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode ............................................................................................217
Figure 5-24 Flow Chart for Configuring the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ...................................................219
Figure 5-25 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card ....................................220
Figure 5-26 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ...................................................221
Figure 5-27 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode.......................................................................222
Figure 5-28 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ...................................................223
Figure 5-29 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) ...............................223
Figure 5-30 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode...........................................224
Figure 5-31 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) .225
Figure 5-32 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) .226
Figure 5-33 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service - SHDSL Circuit Emulation
Service Based on TDM .................................................................227
Figure 5-34 Configuration Flow of the G.SHDSL Service - SHDSL Circuit
Emulation Service Based on TDM .................................................231
Figure 5-35 Configuring the Clock Reference Source for the Card ....................232
Figure 5-36 Time Recovery Configuration ........................................................233
Figure 5-37 Configuring E1 Service .................................................................233
Figure 5-38 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN - TDM Circuit Emulation Service
Based on SHDSL .........................................................................234
Figure 5-39 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card ....................................235
Figure 5-40 Configuring E1 Data......................................................................236
Figure 5-41 Enabling an SHDSL Port...............................................................237
Figure 5-42 Enabling an SHDSL Port - Completed ...........................................237
Figure 5-43 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile................................................238
Figure 5-44 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile............................239
Figure 5-45 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile - Completed ........240
Figure 5-46 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service - Circuit Emulation Service
Based on E1.................................................................................241
Figure 5-47 Configuration Flow of the G.SHDSL Service - Circuit Emulation
Service Based on E1 ....................................................................243
Figure 5-48 Configuring E1 Service .................................................................244
Figure 5-49 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN - Circuit Emulation Service
Based on E1.................................................................................245
Figure 5-50 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card ....................................246
Figure 6-1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End........................248
Figure 6-2 Adding a Port into the VLAN..........................................................249
Figure 6-3 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode..............................................250
Figure 6-4 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN .........................................250
Figure 6-5 Network Diagram of the ADSL Multicast Service in the Proxy
Mode ............................................................................................251
Figure 6-6 Flow of Configuring the Multicast Service on the ADSL Card in the
Proxy Mode ..................................................................................254
Figure 6-7 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression.................255
Figure 6-8 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner.....................256
Figure 6-9 Configuration for Enabling the ADSL Port Completed ....................257
Figure 6-10 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN in the Proxy Mode................258
Figure 6-11 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode..............................................259
Figure 6-12 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Proxy Mode.......259
Figure 6-13 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN .........................................260
Figure 6-14 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 in the Proxy Mode ................261
Figure 6-15 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data.................262
Figure 6-16 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Proxy
Mode ............................................................................................263
Figure 6-17 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Proxy
Mode ............................................................................................264
Figure 6-18 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information ..................................265
Figure 6-19 Viewing Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Proxy
Mode ............................................................................................265
Figure 6-20 Checking the Core Switch Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy
Mode ............................................................................................266
Figure 6-21 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy
Mode ............................................................................................267
Figure 6-22 Network Diagram of the VDSL Multicast Service in the Controlled
Mode ............................................................................................268
Figure 6-23 Flow of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the
Controllable Mode.........................................................................273
Figure 6-24 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression.................274
Figure 6-25 Enabling the VDSL Ports (Completed)...........................................275
Figure 6-26 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN in the Controlled Mode.........276
Figure 6-27 Configuring the Controllable Multicast Mode..................................277
Figure 6-28 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Controllable
Mode ............................................................................................277
Figure 6-29 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN in the Controllable Mode ........278
Figure 6-30 Configuring the Multicast Profile ....................................................279
Figure 6-31 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters .......................................280
Figure 6-32 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters ..........................................281
Figure 6-33 Selecting Ports in the Controllable Mode .......................................282
Figure 6-34 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data.................282
Figure 6-35 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Controllable
Mode ............................................................................................284
Figure 6-36 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Controllable
Mode ............................................................................................285
Figure 6-37 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal
User .............................................................................................286
Figure 6-38 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview
User .............................................................................................286
Figure 6-39 Viewing the Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the
Controllable Mode.........................................................................287
Figure 6-40 Checking the MCU Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controlled
Mode ............................................................................................287
Figure 6-41 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controllable
Mode ............................................................................................288
Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card .........................292
Figure 7-2 Saving the Configuration into the Flash .........................................293
Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration Data....................................294
Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software...................................................294
Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Management Control Card .....................................295
Figure 7-6 Resetting the Management Control Card.......................................296
Figure 7-7 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control Card...296
Figure 7-8 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software .............298
Figure 7-9 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch
Manner.........................................................................................299
Figure 7-10 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card................................................299
Figure 7-11 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card ...........300
Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network ........................................................303
Figure 8-2 Configuration Flow of Manual Aggregation ....................................305
Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control Card -
Manual Aggregation......................................................................306
Figure 8-4 Configuring the Trunking Mode - Manual Aggregation....................306
Figure 8-5 Configuring the Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation ...............307
Figure 8-6 Network Diagram for the Static LACP Aggregation.........................308
Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACP Aggregation ............................. 311
Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control Card -
Manual Aggregation......................................................................312
Figure 8-9 Configuring the LACP Global Parameters......................................312
Figure 8-10 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters .........................................313
Figure 8-11 Configuring the Trunking Mode - Static LACP Aggregation.............314
Figure 8-12 Configuring the Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation ...............314
Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance...........................321
Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile .............322
Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ...................322
Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters...........................325
Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode.....................................................326
Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card ..........................................................326
Figure 9-7 Enabling the Rectifier Module........................................................327
Figure 9-8 Checking the Instant Performance of the HCU Card ......................328
Figure 9-9 Viewing the Current Alarms of the HCU Card.................................328
Figure 9-10 Checking the Alarm History of the HCU Card.................................329
Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test.............................331
Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test ......................................332
Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test ......................................333
Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result .........................333
Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test............................334
Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test............................................335
Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test ...............................336
Figure 10-8 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result ........................337
Figure 10-9 Configuring the Ping Test Parameters ...........................................339
Figure 10-10 Ping Test ......................................................................................340
Figure A-1 Opening the WFTP Software.........................................................343
Figure A-2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI ..........................................343
Figure A-3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1 .................344
Figure A-4 Entering User Password 1.............................................................344
Figure A-5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package...........345
Figure A-6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool...................................345
Figure A-7 Logging Options ...........................................................................346
Tables

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel ..9
Table 2-1 Configuring Cards for the AN5006-20..............................................29
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service ......................................39
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service ..........................................60
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode ............................................................................................100
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode.....................124
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode ............................................................................................149
Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode ...172
Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode ............................................................................................192
Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode ............................................................................................218
Table 5-3 Planning Data of the SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service Based on TDM
on the OLT Side ............................................................................228
Table 5-4 Planning Data of the SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service Based on TDM
on the AN5006-20 Side.................................................................229
Table 5-5 Planning Data of the Circuit Emulation Service Based on E1 on the
OLT Side ......................................................................................242
Table 5-6 Planning Data of the Circuit Emulation Service Based on E1 on the
AN5006-20 Side ...........................................................................242
Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode....................252
Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode.............269
Table 7-1 Planning Data of Upgrading the Management Control Card ...........291
Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type ......297
Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software ....297
Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode Configuration ............303
Table 8-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Static LACP Aggregation Mode...309
Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold
Parameters and Alarm Clearing Threshold Parameters .................316
Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Instance .......................................................................................318
Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Parameters...................................................................................323
Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters....................................................................339
Table 10-2 Ping Test Result............................................................................341
1 Configuring the UNM2000
Management Channel

Before using the UNM2000 to manage the equipment, users need to configure the
UNM2000 management channel via the Console control platform (shortened as
Console in the following). The following introduces how to configure the UNM2000
management channel.

Logging into the Console

Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Logging into the UNM2000

Version: C/1 1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

1.1 Logging into the Console

The following introduces how to log into the Console.

1.1.1 First-time Login to the Console

Log into the Console through the Window’s Hyper Terminal to access the CLI
network management system for the equipment.

Prerequisite

u The network management computer has been connected with the equipment
by the Console cable.

u The network management computer has been started normally.

u The equipment is powered on normally.

u The user name and password for logging in the CLI network management
system for the AN5006-20 are available.

Procedure

1. Click the Start menu on the desktop, and select All Programs→Accessories
→Telecom→Hyper Terminal to bring up the Connection Description dialog
box.

Note:

The Windows XP operating system is used as an example here.

2. In the Connection Description dialog box, configure the parameters as


follows:

4 Name: Fill in the name of a connection object, e.g. FiberHome CLI


Control Terminal.

4 Icon: Select an icon for this connection.

2 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Click OK, and the Connect To dialog box appears.

3. Select the COM1 port of the Console interface on the management control card
in the drop-down list of the Connect using tab in the Connect To dialog box.

Click OK, and the COM1 Properties dialog box appears.

4. In the COM1 Properties dialog box, click the Restore Defaults button. The
default configurations are as below:

4 Bits per second: 9600

Version: C/1 3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4 Data bits: 8

4 Parity: None

4 Stop bits: 1

4 Flow control: None

Click OK to start up the Console.

4 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

5. Press the <ENTER> key, and enter the user name and the password to log into
the CLI network management system. The commands are as follows:
Login:GEPON
// The default user is common user, and the user name is GEPON.
Password:*****
// The initial password is GEPON.
User>enable
// In the read-only mode, use the enable command to enter the management mode.
Password:*****
// The initial password of the administrator account is GEPON.
Admin#
// After the prompt Admin#appears, you can enter command lines to perform network management
operations on the AN5006-20.

Version: C/1 5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Note:

u If the command prompt is User>, the system is in the common user


mode; if the command prompt is Admin#, the system is in the
administrator mode.

u The user name is case insensitive, while the password should be


capitalized.

Caution:

To enhance the security of the system, users should memorize their


passwords and keep them secret. Regularly changing passwords is
strongly recommended.

6. Select File→Save from the menu bar of the Console window to save the
configurations for the Console.

1.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console

After establishing the Console for the AN5006-20 CLI network management system
in their first login, users can directly access the Console via the CLI network
management system the next time.

Prerequisite

u The network management computer has been connected with the equipment
by the Console cable.

u The network management computer has been started normally.

u The equipment is powered on normally.

u The Console for the AN5006-20's CLI network management system has been
set up (the following takes the FiberHome CLI Control Terminal as an
example).

6 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Procedure

1. Select Start→Program→Accessories→Telecom→HyperTerminal→
FiberHome CLI Control Terminal from the desktop to bring up the Telnet
default? alert box.

4 Click Yes, the Hyper Terminal will be used as the default Telnet program;

4 Click No, the Hyper Terminal will not be used as the default Telnet
program.

Enter the established Console.

Note:

To set up a shortcut for convenience, drag and drop FiberHome CLI


Control Terminal to the desktop.

1.2 Configuring the UNM2000 Management


Channel

The following introduces how to configure the UNM2000 management channel.

1.2.1 Configuration Rules

u The equipment uses the MCU-GPON or MCU-GPON2 card to implement the


GPON uplink; it uses the MCUD card to implement the XG-PON uplink.

u The management VLAN and IP address are only valid in the equipment CPU.
Users need to configure the corresponding uplink service VLAN for the
management port.

u If the VLAN tag processing mode is set to untag, the port default VLAN should
be configured.

Version: C/1 7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

1.2.2 Network Diagram

The AN5006-20 can support up to four management VLANs, thus the user can
manage the equipment even in a complex network. The UNM2000 client end
manages the equipment via the uplink port of the equipment.

When the AN5006-20 uses the GPON uplink port, the network diagram of the
UNM2000 management channel is shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 The UNM2000 Network Diagram

8 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

1.2.3 Planning Data

Table 1-1 lists the planning data for configuring the UNM2000 management
channel for the AN5006-20.

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Item Description Example

Slot No. The number of the slot actually used 14

PON No. The number of the PON port actually used 1


The ONU authorization number assigned
Authenticating and ONU No. 1
by the system automatically.
authorizing an ONU
Authentication Configure this item according to the PHYSIC_ID
mode network planning of the operator. AUTHENTICATION
Physical Address The MAC address of the ONU. FHTT03346498
Configure this item according to the
Service Name data
network planning of the operator.

The starting VLAN ID of the uplink port


Configuring the local Starting VLAN ID 3500
service.
end service outer
The ending VLAN ID of the uplink port
VLAN (optional)
Ending VLAN ID service. The starting VLAN ID should not 3500
be larger than the ending VLAN ID.

Service Type Select Data for the data service. Data


VLAN ID - 3500
Read only. The default value is Common
VLAN Type Common VLAN
VLAN.
Adding a port into the
Configure this item according to the
VLAN (optional)
Interface No. number of the uplink port or Trunk group in 19:SFP1
actual use.
TAG / UNTAG Configure the tag processing mode for the TAG

Version: C/1 9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Item Description Example

uplink service VLAN. Two options are


available: TAG and UNTAG.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the port
and the packets will be further
transmitted in the untag mode, while
the downlink untagged packets will be
added with corresponding tags when
they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the
uplink / downlink data packets will not
be processed when they pass the port.

The slot number of the OLT GPON


Slot No. interface card corresponding to the ONU; 14
read-only.

The PON port number of the OLT GPON


PON No. interface card corresponding to the ONU; 1
read-only.

The authorization number of the OLT


Onu No. GPON interface card of the ONU; read- 1
only.

Read-only, assigned by the system


SN –
automatically.

Configuring the ONU Configure this item according to the


Manage ID 1
management VLAN network planning of the operator.

The name of the management VLAN


Name manage
actually used.

When the in-band management mode is


used, all the ports should be selected since
Port No. All ports
the management can only be performed
via the uplink interface of the AN5006-20.

Configure this item according to the


Tag/Untag network planning of the operator. Select tag
tag or untag.

Manage SVLAN
The default setting is 33024. 33024
Tpid

10 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Item Description Example

The outer management VLAN value of the


ONU, ranging from 1 to 4085. If single-
Manage SVLAN
tagged management VLAN is used, this 3500
Id
item is used to set the single-tagged
management VLAN value.

The priority of the ONU's outer


Manage SVLAN management VLAN. The value ranges
7
Cos from 0 to 7, and 7 stands for the highest
priority level.

Manage CVLAN
The default setting is 33024. -
Tpid

The inner management VLAN value of the


Manage CVLAN ONU, ranging from 1 to 4085. If single-

Id tagged VLAN is used, the management
CVLAN should be set to null.
The priority of the ONU's inner
Manage CVLAN management VLAN. The value ranges

Cos from 0 to 7, and 7 stands for the highest
priority level.

The ONU IP address. Set it to the IP


Ipaddr 10.98.30.31
address in actual use.
Configure this item according to the
Mask 255.255.0.0
network planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to the


Gateway 10.98.1.254
network planning of the operator.

Route The IP address of the network


10.30.2.1
Destination management server.

Adding static routing The gateway of the network where the


Gateway 10.30.1.254
(optional) network management server is located.

The mask of the network where the


Mask 255.255.0.0
network management server is located.

Set the type of the service. The options


Service Type available include IPTV, Integrated, Internet, Voice

Configuring the TDM and voice, etc.

integrated service Configure this item according to the


Fixed Bandwidth 8000
bandwidth network planning of the operator.

Assured Configure this item according to the


256
Bandwidth network planning of the operator.

Version: C/1 11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)

Item Description Example

Maximum Configure this item according to the


10000
Bandwidth network planning of the operator.

1.2.4 Configuration Flow

The flow for configuring the UNM2000 management channel is shown in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2 Configuration Flow of the UNM2000 Management Channel

12 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

1.2.5 Authenticating and Authorizing the ONU

Authenticate the AN5006-20 based on the physical identifier, and the system will
allocate the authorization number to it automatically.

For other authentication and authorization modes, please refer to AN5116-06B


Optical Line Terminal Equipment EPON Configuration Guide or AN5116-06B
Optical Line Terminal Equipment GPON Configuration Guide.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to access the Local Service Config-PON service tab.

3. Select Common Config→PON→PON Authentication Mode from the


Operational Tree pane to bring up the PON Authentication Mode tab.

4. Double-click the Authentication mode field in the row for PON port 1 in Slot 14,
and select PHYSIC_ID AUTHENTICATION from the drop-down menu.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3 Configuring the PON Port Authentication Mode

6. Click the Obtain Unauthorized ONU button on the toolbar to bring up the
Switch Object (Unauthorized ONU List) dialog box.

Version: C/1 13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

7. Select PON port 1 in Slot 14 in the Switch Object (Unauthorized ONU List)
dialog box, and click OK. Then select the ONU whose physical address is
FHTT033346498, as illustrated in Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4 The Get Unauthorized ONU Dialog Box - Based on Physical Identifier

8. Click the Add to the ONU Authority List button on the toolbar, select Current
Row in the dialog box that appears, and click OK.

9. Click the Create On Device button on the toolbar. See Figure 1-5 for the
illustration of a successful authorization.

Figure 1-5 Automatic Authorization Succeeded - Based on Physical Identifier

1.2.6 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End

When the management SVLAN of the ONU is different from the management VLAN
of the OLT, you need to configure on the OLT a local end data service VLAN that has
the same value with the management SVLAN of the ONU. Skip this step if the
management SVLAN of the ONU is the same with the management VLAN of the
OLT. It is advised to set the management SVLAN of the ONU and the management
VLAN of the OLT to the same value.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to bring up the Local Service Config-PON service tab from the
menu bar.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Local VLAN→Local


End Service Outer VLAN to open the Local End Service Outer VLAN tab.

14 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box
that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End

1.2.7 Adding ports to the VLAN

After creating the local end service VLAN, users can configure the corresponding
uplink ports for the VLAN.

Procedures

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to open the Local Service Config-PON service tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Add vlan to port to


open the Add vlan to port tab.

4. Select the left pane, click Add, enter 1 in the displayed dialog box and then
click OK to add a VLAN configuration entry.

5. Select the right pane, click Add, enter 1 in the displayed dialog box, and then
click OK to add a port configuration entry.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 1-7.

Version: C/1 15
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 1-7 Adding a Port into the VLAN

1.2.8 Configuring the ONU Management VLAN

Configure the parameters such as the management VLAN and the IP address of the
equipment.

The equipment supports QinQ management VLANs to provide users with double-
layered management channels.

The equipment supports up to four management VLANs, so that users can manage
the equipment even in a complex network.

Procedures

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Click the ONU List button on the toolbar to open the ONU List pane.

3. Right-click the ONU to be configured, and select Service Config in the shortcut
menu that appears to bring up the Service Config tab.

4. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Manage VLAN to


access the Manage VLAN tab.

5. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add: dialog box
that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create On Device button in the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 1-8.

Figure 1-8 Configuring the Management VLAN for an ONU

16 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

1.2.9 Adding Static Routing

When the network management server is in the same network segment with the
managed ONU, users need to add the static routing information.

While configuring the static routing, users need to configure the IP address and
mask of the destination network segment and the gateway address of the next-hop
routing.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to bring up the Local Service Config-PON service tab from the
menu bar.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet Config→Static Routing to


open the "Static Routing" tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 1-9.

Figure 1-9 Adding Static Routing

1.2.10 Configuring Bandwidth of Various Services

The following introduces how to configure the bandwidth allocation policies of


various services as required.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Click the ONU list button on the toolbar to bring up the ONU List tab.

Version: C/1 17
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3. Right-click the desired card, and select Service Config from the shortcut menu
that appears to bring up the Service Config tab.

4. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→GPON Service


Bandwidth Config to access the GPON Service Bandwidth Config tab.

5. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add: dialog box
that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 1-10.

Figure 1-10 Configuring Bandwidth of the Integrated Service

1.2.11 Configuration Result

After the aforesaid steps, the configuration of the UNM2000 management channel is
completed, and users can log into the UNM2000 to manage and maintain the
equipment.

1.3 Logging into the UNM2000


Prerequisites

u JRE1.6.0 has been installed.

u The server end is running normally.

u The communication between the server end and client end is normal.

Procedure

1. Double-click the browser icon, enter http://server end IP address:port number/


webstart/ (for example, http://10.98.20.53:8080/webstart/) in the address field of

18 Version: C/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel

the browser, and press Enter to access the page for installing the UNM2000
client end.

Note:

The port number refers to the Tomcat access port number that users set
when installing the server end.

2. Click “UNM2000 client end” to bring up the alert box as shown below to perform
download validation and installation of the client end software.

3. Enter the username and password (both are admin by default) in the "Log into
UNM2000" dialog box that appears. Fill in the IP address of the corresponding
server in "Server" and click "Log in".

Note:
If you log in the UNM2000 successfully, the server end and client end
have both been installed correctly.

Version: C/1 19
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

20 Version: C/1
2 Adding Equipment

After logging into the UNM2000, users need to add the to-be-managed equipment
to a logical domain so as to manage and maintain it. The following introduces the
operation steps for adding equipment.

Configuration Rules

Configuration Flow

Creating the Logical Domain

Creating the Access NE

Adding Cards

Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address

Configuring the SNMP Time System

Synchronizing Time

Saving the Configuration Data to Flash

Version: C/1 21
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

2.1 Configuration Rules

u If the LAN network management mode is used, the IP address of the system
should be consistent with the equipment IP address set for the in-band
management VLAN, so that the network management server can communicate
normally with the AN5006-20. For example, if the equipment IP address set for
the management VLAN is 10.98.20.20, the IP address of the system should
also be set to 10.98.20.20.

u When the network management computer and the equipment are not in the
same LAN, users need to manage the equipment through a gateway. In such
case, the IP address of the system and the gateway IP address of the
equipment set for the management VLAN should be in the same network
segment, so that the network management computer can access and manage
the AN5006-20 through the gateway. For example, if the gateway IP address of
the equipment set in the management VLAN is 10.98.x.x (the subnet mask is
255.255.0.0), the IP address of the system should also be set to 10.98.x.x (the
subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, and must be different from the IP address of the
gateway).

2.2 Configuration Flow

See Figure 2-1 for the flow of adding equipment.

22 Version: C/1
2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-1 The Flow of Adding Device

2.3 Creating the Logical Domain

Divide the management objects by creating the corresponding logical domains


according to the requirements of the operators to enable management based on
authorization and domain.

Procedure

1. Right-click a blank area of the Main Topology pane and select Create Logical
Domain from the shortcut menu to bring up the Create Global Logical
Domain dialog box.

Version: C/1 23
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 2-2 Creating the Logical Domain

2. Enter the desired name in the Logical Domain Name field. Alias Name and
Remark are optional items.

3. Click OK to save the settings and create a new logical domain.

24 Version: C/1
2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-3 Logical Domain Creation Completed

2.4 Creating the Access NE

Add the AN5006-20 module to the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Right-click the created logical domain and select Create NE→Create access
NE... from the shortcut menu.

2. Configure the parameters in the Creating access NE dialog box. See


Figure 2-4.

Version: C/1 25
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 2-4 Creating the Access NE

3. Click OK and the newly created access NE will appear in the main topology, as
illustrated in Figure 2-5.

26 Version: C/1
2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-5 The Access NE Creation Completed

2.5 Adding Cards

The following introduces how to add various cards needed for the operation of the
equipment and services in the equipment system.

2.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically

Procedure

1. Right-click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane and select


Detect Physical Configuration from the shortcut menu to open the Detect
Physical Configuration tab.

2. Select the desired synchronization mode.

3. Click Detect Physical Configuration, and the progress and the results of the
detection are displayed in the right part of the window, as shown in Figure 2-6.

Version: C/1 27
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 2-6 Result of Physical Configuration Detection

4. Click Synchronize All and click OK when the Synchronize operation


succeeded message appears to complete adding the card automatically.

5. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology pane to open the NE manager and
check if the cards displayed in the subrack view are consistent with the result of
physical detection; if consistent, the cards are added successfully, as shown in
Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 The Subrack View

2.5.2 Adding Cards Manually

The cards can be added to the subrack view manually one by one.
After adding the AN5006-20 system NE, double-click this NE in the main topology to
open the NE Manager. The subrack view will be displayed in the right pane, as
shown in Figure 2-8.

28 Version: C/1
2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-8 The Subrack View (No Card Added)

The cards that can be configured in the AN5006-20 subrack view are listed in
Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Configuring Cards for the AN5006-20

Card Name Abbreviation Applicable Slot Quantity

MCU-GPON 5 1
MCU-GPON2 5 1
MCUD 5 1
POTS 1 to 4 0 to 4
POTS32 1 to 4 0 to 4
AD32 1 to 4 0 to 4
AD64 1 to 4 0 to 4
VD32 1 to 4 0 to 4
CASA 1 to 4 0 to 4
BRIA 1 to 4 0 to 4
HDT8A 1 to 4 0 to 4
HDT8B 1 to 4 0 to 4
HDT32A 1 to 4 0 to 4
PWRB 6 1
FANB 7 1
HCU-20 801 0 to 1

In this example, the FANB card is added to Slot 7 manually in the subrack view. See
below for the operation procedures:

Version: C/1 29
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedures

1. Right-click the desired slot and select "Add Card" from the shortcut menu. Then
select the desired card type from the sub-menu that appears. See Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9 Adding Cards Manually

Modifying a Card

u Modifying the card properties

Right-click the card to be modified in the subrack view or the Device Tree on
the left, and select Attribute from the shortcut menu. Then modify the card
properties in the Property Page on the right. Click Apply to save the
modification.

u Deleting a card

Right-click the card to be deleted in the subrack view or the Device Tree on the
left, and select Delete Card from the shortcut menu to delete the selected card.

u Replacing a card

Right-click the card to be replaced in the subrack view and select Replace
Card from the shortcut menu. Then select the desired card in the submenu.
After replacing the card, reconfigure the parameters for the new card or use the
default settings.

2.6 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver


Address

Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address, and then the system will send the Trap
message to the address.

30 Version: C/1
2 Adding Equipment

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Common Config→SNMP TRAP Receiver IP from the Operational


Tree pane to bring up the SNMP TRAP Receiver IP tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box
that appears, type 1 and click OK to add an SNMP TRAP receiver address.

5. Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address (the IP address of the network
management server in use), UDP port number, community name and SNMP
version.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address

2.7 Configuring the SNMP Time System

Configure the SNMP time system, including the interval for time synchronization and
the IP address of the network management system server.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Common Config→Time Config→Time Management from the


Operational Tree, and select the Snmp System Time Config tab.

4. Configure the EMS synchronization interval and the IP address of the EMS
server.

Version: C/1 31
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11 Configuring the SNMP Time System

2.8 Synchronizing Time

System time synchronization aims to synchronize the network management server


with the equipment in time and check whether the communication between them is
smooth.

Note:

After being connected to the network management server, the equipment


will apply to the server for time synchronization. When connected to
multiple network management servers, the equipment will apply to the
first server connected to it for time synchronization. To choose another
network management server for time synchronization of the equipment,
users can reconfigure the SNMP time system.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System Control→Time Calibration to


bring up the Issue the command dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-12.

32 Version: C/1
2 Adding Equipment

Figure 2-12 Synchronizing System Time

4. Click OK to start executing the time synchronization command.

5. After the time calibration is completed successfully, click the Close button.

2.9 Saving the Configuration Data to Flash

To prevent loss of equipment configuration data subsequent to power failure, it is


recommended that users should take this operation after they have completed
service provisioning and function configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System Control→Save Config to Flash


to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 2-13.

Version: C/1 33
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 2-13 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

34 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

The following introduces how to start up the voice services for the equipment.

Note:

The PSTN voice service is supported by the MCUA card only; while the
NGN voice service is supported by the MCUB, MCUC, MCUD, MCU-
EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and MCU-GPON2 card.

Common Configuration

Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - H.248

Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - SIP

Common Configuration

MEGACO / MGCP Configuration

SIP Configuration

Registering / Unregistering the MGC

Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Viewing the Voice Statistics Information

Version: C/1 35
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3.1 Common Configuration

The following introduces the procedures of common configurations on the


equipment to start up voice services.

3.1.1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End

Configure the uplink port service VLAN, and set the VLAN ID range for the services
passing the uplink port of the AN5116-06B, so as to identify the services according
to their VLAN IDs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to bring up the Local Service Config-PON service tab from the
menu bar.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Local VLAN→Local


End Service Outer VLAN to open the Local End Service Outer VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End

3.1.2 Adding ports to the VLAN

After creating the local end service VLAN, users can configure the corresponding
uplink ports for the VLAN.

36 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Implement the voice service at the OLT side. Set the uplink port number or the
TRUNK group number of the VLAN and set untag / tag for the VLAN. The AN5006-
20 uploads the voice service to the IP network for transmission via the OLT AN5116-
06B, so that multiple subscribers under the AN5006-20 system can access the VoIP
service.

Procedures

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to open the Local Service Config-PON service tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Add vlan to port to


open the Add vlan to port tab.

4. Select the left pane, click Add, enter 1 in the displayed dialog box and then
click OK to add a VLAN configuration entry.

5. Select the right pane, click Add, enter 1 in the displayed dialog box, and then
click OK to add a port configuration entry.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Adding a Port into the VLAN

3.2 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service -


H.248

The following gives an example to introduce how to configure the VoIP service using
the H.248 protocol.

Version: C/1 37
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3.2.1 Configuration Rules

u When configuring the VoIP voice service VLAN, make sure the service VLAN
ID is within the range of the uplink port VLAN IDs, and the uplink port VLAN ID
is within the range of the OLT local VLAN IDs.

u The VoIP service supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.

u The POTS64 and POTS32 cards provide 64 and 32 interfaces respectively.

u The CASA card provides 32 voice and data combined interfaces, and it is
configured in the same way as the POTS card.

u The BRIA card connects to the NT1+ equipment with eight U interfaces, and
can provide altogether 16 voice interfaces. The BRIA card is configured in the
same way as the POTS card.

3.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The subscriber services require 64 telephones. VoIP Call is established through


signaling interaction with the SoftSwitch using the H.248 protocol. The subscribers
are connected to the AN5006-20 via ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card.

Network Diagram

Figure 3-3 shows the network diagram for the voice service in the H.248 mode.

Figure 3-3 Network Diagram of the H.248 Voice Service

38 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

The H.248 protocol separates the signaling from the RTP flow to access the users'
voice services. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of the
upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the
media server.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access the voice services using the CASA, POTS32, POTS or
BRIA cards. In this example, the POTS card is used.

3.2.3 Planning Data

Planning data for the H.248 voice service are shown in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


Service Name ngn1
network planning of the operator.

Configuring Configure this item according to the


Starting VLAN ID 200
the outer network planning of the operator.
VLAN data at Configure this item according to the
Ending VLAN ID 200
the local end network planning of the operator.

NGN should be selected for the VoIP


Service Type NGN
service.
VLAN ID - 200
Read only. The default value is
VLAN Type Common VLAN
Common VLAN.
Adding ports
The outlet for the OLT to transmit data
to the VLAN
to the upper layer equipment.
Interface No. 19:SFP1
Configure this item according to the
uplink port number actually used.

Version: C/1 39
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure the tag processing mode for


the uplink service VLAN. Two options
are available: "TAG" and "UNTAG".
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the
port and the packets will be further
transmitted in the untagged mode,
TAG / UNTAG TAG
while the downlink untagged
packets will be added with
corresponding tags when they
pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the
uplink / downlink data packets will
not be processed when they pass
the port.

Configure this item according to the


Slot No. 4
actual situations.
Configure this item according to the
Port No. 1 to 64
Enabling the actual situations.
POTS ports When the voice service is configured,
this item must be set to Enable.
Enable Enable
Otherwise the service cannot be
provisioned.

Service ID Read-only item. 1


The user can enter numbers, letters
and underlines not exceeding 30
Service Name ngn
characters for the subscriber service
name.
The starting VLAN ID of the service.
Configuring Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding
the uplink Starting VLAN ID 4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting 200
service VLAN VLAN ID should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

The ending VLAN ID of the service.


Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding
Ending VLAN ID 4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting 200
VLAN ID should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

40 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The port number of the service or the


Trunk group number.
Port No./TRUNK Group If the uplink port has joined the Trunk
PON
ID group, the system only displays the
Trunk group number, instead of the
uplink port number.

Set the uplink service VLAN tag


processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the
Port Tag/Untag tag
uplink port and the packets will be
transmitted in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the
uplink data packets will not be
stripped when they pass the
uplink port.

The voice VLAN includes the signaling


VLAN and the RTP flow VLAN. The
signaling VLAN refers to the VLAN tag
VoIP VLAN Type carried by the voice signaling flow, signal vlan RTP vlan
while the RTP flow VLAN refers to the
VLAN tag carried by the voice flow.
This item is read-only.

Unconfigurable. Null by default


Service NAME -
currently.
Configuring The protocol identifier, ranging from 1
Svlan Tpid 33024
the voice to 65534. The default setting is 33024.
VLAN The SVLAN ID in the QinQ mode or
the VLAN ID in the single-tagged
mode. The VLAN ID should be within
Svlan Id 200
the uplink port VLAN range. The value
ranges from 1 to 4085, and should not
be null.
The service VLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands for
Svlan CoS 7
the highest priority level and 0 the
lowest. The default value is 7.

Version: C/1 41
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1


to 65534. The default setting is 33024.
Cvlan Tpid 33024
Users need not configure this item
when single VLAN is used.

The CVLAN ID in the QinQ mode.


Cvlan Id Users need not configure this item in 10 20
the single-VLAN mode.

The user VLAN priority level. The


value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 is the
highest priority while 0 is the lowest.
Cvlan CoS 7
The default setting is 7. Users need
not configure this item when single
VLAN is used.
The IP address or domain name of the
Primary MGC 192.168.1.1
primary softswitch platform MGC.

The communication port of the primary


softswitch platform MGC. The value
Primary MGC Port 2944
ranges from 0 to 65535, and the
default value is 2944.
The IP address or domain name of the
Secondary MGC 192.168.2.1
secondary softswitch platform MGC.
Configuring
Megaco / The communication port of the

MGCP secondary softswitch platform MGC.


Secondary MGC Port 2944
softswitch The value ranges from 0 to 65535, and

platform the default value is 2944.

parameters Controls whether the ONU regularly


sends keep-alive messages to the
Keep Alive softswitch platform MGC. Options Enable Initiative
available are "Enable Initiative",
"Enable Passive" and "Disable".
The interval of sending the keep-alive
messages. The value ranges from 1 to
Alive Interval (s) 30
86400 (unit: s), and the default value is
30.

42 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The maximum timeout times that the


softswitch platform MGC permits the
ONU to send the keep-alive
messages; if the value is exceeded, it
Alive Times 3
is considered that the MGC loses its
communication with the ONU. The
value ranges from 1 to 120. The
default setting is 3.

The options include "Notify" and


Alive format Notify
"Service Change".

IP config mode Supports the static mode. static


The IP address of the core switch card
IPv4: 192.168.1.101 / 255.
Signal IP CPU, used to communicate with the
255.255.0
MGC.
The address of the signaling gateway, IPv4: 192.168.1.254 / 255.
Signal Gateway
used to forward the data of the MGC. 255.255.0
The IP address of the core switch card IPv4: 192.168.2.101 / 255.
RTP IP
DSP. 255.255.0
The address of the RTP gateway. This
IPv4: 192.168.2.254 / 255.
RTP Gateway gateway is used to forward the RTP
255.255.0
flow communicating with other MGs.
Configuring The IP address of the primary domain
the voice IP name system. Users need configure
address the DNS only when the domain name
Primary DNS is used as the MGC address. In this -
example, IP address is used as the
MGC address, so you need not
configure the DNS.

The IP address of the secondary


domain name system. Users need
configure the DNS only when the
Second DNS domain name is used as the MGC -
address. In this example, IP address is
used as the MGC address, so you
need not configure the DNS.

Version: C/1 43
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The domain name of the gateway. The


default setting is null; users can
configure the item according to actual
conditions. If the Softswitch platform
requires registration in terms of
domain name, the user should apply
Domain Name -
for a domain name for the equipment
from the Softswitch center.
When the domain name is null, use the
following as domain name by default:
Configuring voice signaling IP address + local
basic voice protocol port number.
parameters
The communication port of the
softswitch platform MGC. The value
Local Protocol Port 2944
ranges from 0 to 65534, and the
default value is 0.
Select the text encoding type (compact
Protocol Encode Type encode or uncompact encode). The uncompact encode
default setting is "uncompact encode".

Select the transmission layer protocol


Transport Protocol Type (TCP or UDP). The default value is UDP
UDP.
The fixed part of the RTP resource
name. If the RTP resource name is
RTP Name Fixed Part RTP/
RTP/1000, the fixed part should be
RTP/. The default setting is RTP/.

The start value of the variable part of


the RTP resource name; the start
RTP Name Begin Value value must be smaller than the end 4000
Configuring
value. The value ranges from 0 to
the RTP
65534, and the default value is 4000.
resource
The end value of the variable part of
profile
RTP name. It must be larger than the
RTP Name End Value start value of the variable part. The 9000
value ranges from 0 to 65534, and the
default value is 9000.
The step of the variable part of RTP
RTP Name Step Value resource name. The value ranges from 1
1 to 65534, and the default value is 1.

44 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select whether to pad the bits


following the fixed part (RTP/) with
zeros automatically to fill the tetrad, for
RTP Name Fill filled
example, to pad RTP/0 to RTP/0000.
Configure according to the actual
condition. The default value: filled.
The number of the slot
Slot No. 4
accommodating the POTS card.

The number of the POTS card port


Port No. physically connected with the 1 to 64
subscriber's phone.
Configuring
The Termination ID corresponds to the
the voice port
PHONE port for identifying the physical end B1 to B10
point.

Configure the DSP profile to be bound


DSP Profile ID with the port. The default value is Default
Default.

3.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow to provision the voice service using the H.248 protocol is
shown in Figure 3-4.

Version: C/1 45
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-4 Flow Chart of the H.248 Voice Service

3.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

Configure the parameters according to the planning data. Refer to Common


Configuration for the configuration procedures.

46 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3.2.6 Enabling the POTS Port

Enable ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card on the AN5006-20 according to the service
planning and demand. By doing so, the subscribers' voice services can be normally
accessed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the POTS card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and enter 64 in
the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 3-5.

Version: C/1 47
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-5 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-6.

48 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-6 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed)

3.2.7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

An uplink port cannot belong to multiple VLANs in the untagged mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

Version: C/1 49
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

3.2.8 Configuring the Voice VLAN

Configure the parameters related to the voice service VLAN. Users can configure
the VLANs for the signaling service and the RTP flow respectively.

Precautions

u Users need only configure the service VLAN instead of the user VLAN when
single VLAN is applied in the network. However, if QinQ VLAN is applied in the
network, users need configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN
according to the network planning.

u When configuring the voice VLAN, make sure the service name here is
consistent with the service name in the uplink port VLAN configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voip Service VLAN to


open the Voip Service VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-8.

50 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-8 Configuring the Voice VLAN

3.2.9 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform


Parameters

Configure the IP address of the MGC and the protocol port number of the NGN.

When the softswitch platform uses the H.248 protocol to control the access
terminals, you should set the MGC protocol type to H.248 for VoIP services, and the
protocol port No. to 2944.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→MEGACO/MGCP


Config→Megaco/MGCP SoftSwitch Config to bring up the Megaco/MGCP
SoftSwitch Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters

Version: C/1 51
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3.2.10 Configuring the Voice IP Address

When the signaling IP address configuration mode is static, users need configure
the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP
address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voice IP Config to open


the Voice IP Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10 Configuring the Voice IP Address

3.2.11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Configure basic voice parameters, setting the transport protocol type to UDP, the
local protocol port to 2944, and the protocol encoding type to uncompacted
encoding.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

52 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voice Base Config to


open the Voice Base Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

3.2.12 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile

Configure the parameters relating to the RTP resource profile, especially, set the
value in the RTP flow packet header in the H.248 protocol.

When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name, please
note that the value 0 cannot be used, and the value of (end value of the variable part
- the start value of the variable part)/the step of the variable part must be smaller
than 6000.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→MEGACO/MGCP


Config→Megaco RTP Config Profile to bring up the Megaco RTP Config
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-12.

Version: C/1 53
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-12 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile

3.2.13 Configuring the Voice Port

Configure parameters relevant to the voice port, and configure the port user name
and the DSP profile, so as to bind the port user name and the user port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voice Port Config to


open the Voice Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Configuring the Voice Port

54 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3.2.14 Configuration End

After completing the configuration of voice services based on the H.248 protocol,
check the equipment status as follows.

3.2.15 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Check the registration status of the current ONU and MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Voice Information→


Voice Device Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Result

The voice equipment has the following three statuses.

u registering

u register successful

u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP
configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local
planning data.

Version: C/1 55
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3.2.16 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status

The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the
related parameters of the IAD module in the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Voice Information→


Voice IP Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status

3.2.17 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupancy.
One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot when the user
port is busy.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Voice Information→


DSP Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.

56 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-16.

Figure 3-16 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Result

The DSP channel has the following two statuses.

u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is in conversation.

u Idle: no endpoint user name is configured or the user is not in normal


conversation.

3.2.18 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Check the port status information of the current user.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS Service→NGN User Port Status in the Operational Tree pane
to bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-17.

Version: C/1 57
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-17 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Result

The user port has the following statuses:

u Registering

u Idle

u Off-hook

u Dialing

u Ringing

u Ring back tone

u Connecting

u Connected

u Release connection

u Register failed

u Unactivated

u Line fault

u Busy

3.3 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service -


SIP

The following gives an example to introduce how to configure the VoIP service using
the SIP protocol.

58 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.1 Configuration Rules

u The VoIP service supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.

u The POTS64 and POTS32 cards provide 64 and 32 interfaces respectively.

u The CASA card supports 32 interfaces, and it is configured in the same way as
the POTS card.

u The BRIA card connects to the NT1+ equipment with eight U interfaces, and
can provide altogether 16 voice interfaces. The BRIA card is configured in the
same way as the POTS card.

u The configuration items such as the SIP authentication user name, the SIP
authentication password, and the SIP subscriber call configuration profile ID
can be edited only when the SIP is used as the communication protocol in the
system.

3.3.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The subscriber services require 64 telephones. VoIP Call is established through


signaling interaction with the SoftSwitch using the SIP. The subscribers are
connected to the AN5006-20 via ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card.

Network Diagram

Figure 3-18 shows the network diagram for the voice service in the SIP mode.

Version: C/1 59
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-18 Network Diagram of the SIP Voice Service

The protocol SIP implements the voice services of users with the signaling and RTP
flow separated. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of the
upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the
media server.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access the voice services using the CASA, POTS32, POTS or
BRIA cards. In this example, the POTS card is used.

3.3.3 Planning Data

Planning data for the SIP voice service are shown in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


Service Name ngn2
network planning of the operator.
Configuring
Configure this item according to the
the outer Starting VLAN ID 600
network planning of the operator.
VLAN data at
Configure this item according to the
the local end Ending VLAN ID 600
network planning of the operator.

Service Type Select NGN for VoIP services. NGN

60 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


Slot No. 1
actual situations.
Configure this item according to the
Port No. 1
actual situations.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink port
Starting VLAN ID 600
service.
The ending VLAN ID of the uplink port
service. The starting VLAN ID should
Ending VLAN ID 600
not be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
Configure the tag processing mode for
the uplink service VLAN. Two options
Adding ports are available: "TAG" and "UNTAG".
to the VLAN u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the
port and the packets will be
further transmitted in the
TAG / UNTAG TAG
untagged mode, while the
downlink untagged packets will
be added with corresponding tags
when they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the
uplink / downlink data packets will
not be processed when they pass
the port.

Configure this item according to the


Slot No. 4
actual situations.
Configure this item according to the
Port No. 1 to 64
Enabling the actual situations.
POTS ports When the voice service is configured,
this item must be set to Enable.
Enable Enable
Otherwise the service cannot be
provisioned.

Service ID Read-only item. 1


Configuring The user can enter numbers, letters
the uplink and underlines not exceeding 30
Service Name ngn
service VLAN characters for the subscriber service
name.

Version: C/1 61
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The starting VLAN ID of the service.


The value ranges from 1 to 4085. The
Starting VLAN ID 600
starting VLAN ID should not be larger
than the ending VLAN ID.

The ending VLAN ID of the service.


The value ranges from 1 to 4085. The
Ending VLAN ID 600
starting VLAN ID should not be larger
than the ending VLAN ID.

The port number of the service or the


Trunk group number.
Port No./TRUNK Group If the uplink port has joined the Trunk
PON
ID group, the system only displays the
Trunk group number, instead of the
uplink port number.

Set the uplink service VLAN tag


processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the
Port Tag/Untag tag
uplink port and the packets will be
transmitted in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the
uplink data packets will not be
stripped when they pass the
uplink port.

The voice VLAN includes the


signaling VLAN and the RTP flow
VLAN. The signaling VLAN refers to
VoIP VLAN Type the VLAN tag carried by the voice signal vlan RTP vlan
signaling flow, while the RTP flow
Configuring
VLAN refers to the VLAN tag carried
the voice
by the voice flow. Read-only item.
VLAN
Unconfigurable. Null by default
Service NAME -
currently.

The protocol identifier, ranging from 1


Svlan Tpid 33024
to 65534. The default setting is 33024.

62 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The SVLAN ID in the QinQ mode or


the VLAN ID in the single-tagged
mode. The VLAN ID should be within
Svlan Id 600
the uplink port VLAN range. The value
ranges from 1 to 4085, and should not
be null.
The service VLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands for
Svlan CoS 7
the highest priority level and 0 the
lowest. The default value is 7.
The protocol identifier, ranging from 1
to 65534. The default setting is 33024.
Cvlan Tpid 33024
Users need not configure this item
when single VLAN is used.

The CVLAN ID in the QinQ mode.


Cvlan Id Users need not configure this item 60 70
when single VLAN is used.

The user VLAN priority level. The


value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 is the
highest priority while 0 is the lowest.
Cvlan CoS 7
The default setting is 7. Users need
not configure this item in the single-
VLAN mode.
The IP address or domain name of the
SipProxySerAddr 192.168.5.101
active SIP proxy server.

The port number of the active SIP


SipProxyPort proxy server. The default setting is 5060
5060.
The IP address or domain name
BackupSipProxySer- address of the standby SIP proxy
Configuring 192.168.6.101
vAddr server. Configure this item according
the SIP server
to the planning data.

The port number of the standby SIP


BackupSipProxyPort proxy server. The default setting is 5060
5060.
The IP address or the domain name
SipRegisterAddr address of the active SIP register 192.168.5.101
server.

Version: C/1 63
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The port number of the active SIP


SipRegisterPort 5060
registrar. The default setting is 5060.

The IP address or the domain name


BackupSipRegisterAddr address of the standby SIP register 192.168.6.101
server.
The port number of the standby SIP
BackupSipRegisterPort 5060
registrar. The default setting is 5060.

After being registered on the SIP


server, an ONU needs to send the
register messages to the SIP server
periodically. That is, in the register
refresh period, the ONU needs to
Sip Register Interval (s) send the register information to the 3600
SIP server to keep the validity of its
registration on the SIP server.
The value ranges from 60 to 3600; the
unit is second; and the default value is
3600.
Controls whether the ONU regularly
sends keep-alive messages to the
Keep Alive softswitch platform MGC. Options Initiative
available are Initiative, Passive and
Disable.
The interval of sending the keep-alive
messages. The value ranges from 1 to
Alive Interval (s) 30
43200 (unit: s), and the default value
is 30.
The maximum timeout times that the
softswitch platform MGC permits the
ONU to send the keep-alive
messages; if the value is exceeded, it
Alive Times 3
is considered that the MGC loses its
communication with the ONU. The
value ranges from 1 to 120. The
default setting is 3.

The options include "By Device" and


Alive Mode By Device
"By Port".

Configuring
the voice IP IP config mode Supports the static mode. static
address

64 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

The IP address of the core switch card


IPv4: 192.168.1.101 / 255.
Signal IP CPU, used to communicate with the
255.255.0
MGC.
The address of the signaling gateway, IPv4: 192.168.1.254 / 255.
Signal Gateway
used to forward the data of the MGC. 255.255.0
The IP address of the core switch card IPv4: 192.168.2.101 / 255.
RTP IP
DSP. 255.255.0
The address of the RTP gateway. This
IPv4: 192.168.2.254 / 255.
RTP Gateway gateway is used to forward the RTP
255.255.0
flow communicating with other MGs.

The IP address of the primary domain


name system. Users need configure
the DNS only when the domain name
Primary DNS is used as the MGC address. In this -
example, IP address is used as the
MGC address, so you need not
configure the DNS.

The IP address of the secondary


domain name system. Users need
configure the DNS only when the
Second DNS domain name is used as the MGC -
address. In this example, IP address
is used as the MGC address, so you
need not configure the DNS.

The domain name of the gateway. The


default setting is null; users can
configure the item according to actual
conditions. If the Softswitch platform
requires registration in terms of
domain name, the user should apply
Domain Name -
for a domain name for the equipment
Configuring
from the Softswitch center.
basic voice
When the domain name is null, use
parameters
the following as domain name by
default: voice signaling IP address +
local protocol port number.

The communication port of the


softswitch platform MGC. The value
Local Protocol Port 5060
ranges from 0 to 65534, and the
default value is 0.

Version: C/1 65
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select the text encoding type


(compact encode or uncompact
Protocol Encode Type uncompact encode
encode). The default setting is
"uncompact encode".

Select the transmission layer protocol


Transport Protocol Type (TCP or UDP). The default value is UDP
UDP.
The digitmap is mainly used by the
MG to determine whether all dial-ups
have been collected. The SIP protocol
does not define the digitmap, and
Configuring most of the terminals use the method [0-9ABCD].|[EF][0-
SIP digitmap
SIP digitmap of dialing # first and then reporting the 9ABCDEF].
number. The configuration of the
digitmap can omit the step of dialing #.
Configure this item according to the
practical project requirements.

The number of the slot


Slot No. 4
accommodating the POTS card.

The number of the POTS card port


Port No. physically connected with the 1 to 64
subscriber's phone.

The actual telephone number of a


PHONE certain port on the ONU. Its value 88881101 to 88881164
must be unique.

The name of the DSP profile bound


DSP Profile ID with the SIP user telephone number. Default
Configuring
The default setting is Default.
the voice port
The user name for authenticating a
certain port of the ONU on the SIP
SIPUSER register sever. When the protocol type 88881101 to 88881164
is H.248 or MGCP, users need not
configure this item.

The password for authenticating a


certain port of the ONU on the SIP
SIPPASSWD register sever. When the protocol type test
is H.248 or MGCP, users need not
configure this item.

66 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)

Item Description Example

Some functions of the ONU will be


SIP User Call Config enabled or disabled based on the
Default
Profile ID profile settings after the ONU is bound
to the profile.

3.3.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow to provision the voice service using the SIP protocol is shown
in Figure 3-19.

Version: C/1 67
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-19 Flow Chart of the SIP Voice Service

3.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

Configure the parameters according to the planning data. Refer to Common


Configuration for the configuration procedures.

68 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.6 Enabling the POTS Port

Enable ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card on the AN5006-20 according to the service
planning and demand. By doing so, the subscribers' voice services can be normally
accessed.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the POTS card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and enter 64 in
the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 3-20.

Version: C/1 69
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-20 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-21.

70 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-21 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed)

3.3.7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLT equipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.

An uplink port cannot belong to multiple VLANs in the untagged mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

Version: C/1 71
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

3.3.8 Configuring the Voice VLAN

Configure the parameters related to the voice service VLAN. Users can configure
the VLANs for the signaling service and the RTP flow respectively.

Precautions

u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN
with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different
designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.

u Users need only configure the service VLAN instead of the user VLAN when
single VLAN is applied in the network. However, if QinQ VLAN is applied in the
network, users need configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN
according to the network planning.

u When configuring the VoIP voice service VLAN, make sure the service VLAN
ID is within the range of the uplink port VLAN IDs, and the uplink port VLAN ID
is within the range of the OLT local VLAN IDs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voip Service VLAN to


open the Voip Service VLAN tab.

72 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 Configuring the Voice VLAN

3.3.9 Configuring the SIP Server

Configure the related parameters of the SIP server. The SIP server includes the
register server and proxy server.

u As a network logical entity, the proxy server can represent the client end to
forward or respond to a request. That is, it can serves as the client end and the
server at the same time. Its main functions include routing, calling control,
service providing, AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA)),
and so on.

u The register server accepts the ONU register request, and then saves and
processes the related information of the ONU register.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→SIP Config→SIP


Server Config to open the SIP Server Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-24.

Version: C/1 73
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-24 Configuring the SIP Server

3.3.10 Configuring the Voice IP Address

When the signaling IP address configuration mode is static, users need configure
the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP
address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voice IP Config to open


the Voice IP Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25 Configuring the Voice IP Address

3.3.11 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

Configure basic voice parameters, setting the transport protocol type to UDP, the
local protocol port to 5060, and the protocol encoding type to compacted encoding.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

74 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voice Base Config to


open the Voice Base Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters

3.3.12 Configuring the SIP Digitmap

The digitmap is mainly used by the MG to determine whether all dial-ups have been
collected. The SIP protocol does not define the digitmap, and most of the terminals
use the method of dialing # first and then reporting the number. The configuration of
the digitmap can omit the step of dialing #.

After configuring the digitmap of the SIP protocol, when the user dials, the number
should match the dialing scheme in the digitmap and then be reported to the
softswitch platform only when a match is found. The SIP digitmap function is
optional and can be configured when required by the operator.

Note:

Users should configure the SIP digitmap according to practical conditions,


so as to enable quick match of telephone numbers.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: C/1 75
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→SIP Config→SIP


digitmap to open the SIP digitmap tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27 Configuring the SIP Digitmap

3.3.13 Configuring the Voice Port

Configure parameters relevant to the voice port, and configure the port user name
and the DSP profile, so as to bind the port user name and the user port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voice Port Config to


open the Voice Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-28.

76 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-28 Configuring the Voice Port

3.3.14 Configuration End

After completing the configuration of voice services based on the SIP protocol,
check the equipment status as follows.

3.3.15 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Check the registration status of the ONU and MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Voice Information→


Voice Device Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-29.

Version: C/1 77
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-29 Checking the Voice Equipment Status

Result

The voice equipment has the following three statuses.

u registering

u register successful

u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP
configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local
planning data.

3.3.16 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status

The following introduces how to view the voice IP status and related parameters of
the IAD module in the ONU.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Voice Information→


Voice IP Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-30.

Figure 3-30 Viewing the Voice IP Address Status

78 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3.3.17 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupancy.
One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot when the user
port is busy.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Voice Information→


DSP Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-31.

Figure 3-31 Checking the DSP Channel Status

Result

The DSP channel has the following two statuses.

u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is in conversation.

u Idle: no endpoint user name is configured or the user is not in normal


conversation.

3.3.18 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Check the port status information of the current user.

Version: C/1 79
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS Service→NGN User Port Status in the Operational Tree pane
to bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-32.

Figure 3-32 Checking the NGN User Port Status

Result

The user port has the following statuses:

u Registering

u Idle

u Off-hook

u Dialing

u Ringing

u Ring back tone

u Connecting

u Connected

u Release connection

u Register failed

u Unactivated

u Line fault

u Busy

80 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3.4 Common Configuration

The following introduces the common configuration items for voice services.

3.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Configure the parameters of the POTS card, which mainly include user dialing,
accounting, off-hook / onhook and voice parameters. The pulse duration should be
set to a value smaller than the FLASH duration.

Note:

The following introduces the access method for configuring the POTS
common parameters on the network management system, applicable for
the MCUB, MCUC, MCUD, MCU-EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and
MCU-GPON2 cards.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→POTS General


Parameter to bring up the POTS General Parameter tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33 Configuring POTS Common Parameters

Version: C/1 81
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer

Set the related parameters of the digitmap to control the report time of the number
that subscribers dial. The start timer is only applicable to the H.248 protocol, while
the maximum wait time, long timer, short timer and digitmap notify are applicable to
the H.248 and SIP protocols.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Voice Timer to open the
Voice Timer tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34 Configuring the Voice Timer

3.4.3 Configuring the DSP Profile

Configure the parameters related to DSP speech encoding, including speech


encoding mode, voice quality, volume, DTMF, and so on. The Default profile cannot
be modified or deleted.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

82 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→DSP Configuration


Profile to bring up the DSP Configuration Profile tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35 Configuring the DSP Profile

3.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters

Configure the related parameters of fax, including the mode, coding mode, fax
report function and packet transmission / receiving time interval used by fax. The
item "VBD Enable" can only be configured when the fax mode is set to "T30
Transparent".

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Fax Parameter to bring


up the Fax Parameter tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36 Configuring Fax Parameters

Version: C/1 83
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3.4.5 Configuring the POS Telephone Number

The following introduces how to configure the POS service telephone number. The
POS number is provided by UnionPay Center. The equipment identifies the POS
services using the POS telephone number and optimizes the POS telephone
number.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→POS Phone Number to


open the POS Phone Number tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a POS phone number
entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the UnionPay


Center.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-37.

Figure 3-37 Configuring the POS Telephone Number

3.4.6 Configuring the IPT Number

The following introduces how to configure the Intelligent Public Telephone (IPT)
number. The prefix of the IPT number is provided by the IPT platform. The
equipment identifies the IPT service using the IPT number and optimizes the IPT
number.

84 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→IPT Phone Number to


open the IPT Phone Number tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add an IPT phone number
entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the IPT platform.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38 Configuring the IPT Number

3.4.7 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone

This command is used to configure the timeout duration of different signal tones
after users pick up the telephone.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→Signal Tone Timer


Config to open the Signal Tone Timer Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

Version: C/1 85
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone

3.4.8 2833 Configuration

2833 is the RTP payload format used by the DTMF digital signal, phone tone and
phone signal. This function is used if no related parameters of the 2833 signaling
negotiation exist.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→2388 Config to open the
2388 Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-40 Configuring 2833

3.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration

The following introduces the voice service MEGACO / MGCP configuration items.

86 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication

Configure the MD5 authentication of the voice service for the authentication
between the MG and MGC. The MD5 authentication is applicable to the H.248
protocol only.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→MEGACO/MGCP


Config→Voice MD5 Authentication to bring up the Voice MD5
Authentication tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data of the project.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication

3.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing


Parameters

Users can configure this parameter to ensure the consistency of the softswitch
platform status and the ONU equipment side status after the howler tone times out.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: C/1 87
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→MEGACO/MGCP


Config→Voice Off Hook Warning Tone Timeout to bring up the Off Hook
Warning Tone Timeout tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters

3.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode

Configure the caller ID display mode for subscribers. The caller ID display modes
include FSK and DTMF.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→MEGACO/MGCP


Config→Caller ID Mode to bring up the Caller ID Mode tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-43.

Figure 3-43 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode

88 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3.6 SIP Configuration

The following introduces how to make advanced SIP configurations and how to
configure the SIP subscriber call profile.

3.6.1 SIP Advanced Configuration

This configuration is used for the intercommunication of the softswitch platform, and
is applicable to the softswitch platforms offered by different manufacturers. It is
advisable to use the default configuration.

In the configuration of user call configuration profile, if the three-party calling


function is disabled, the Call CW/CONF Mode parameter in the SIP advanced
configuration is invalid.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→SIP Config→SIP


Advanced Config to open the SIP Advanced Config tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 SIP Advanced Configuration

Version: C/1 89
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile

Some of the ONU voice functions will be enabled or disabled according to the profile.
After being bound to the profile, the ONU port will get its configuration from the
profile. It is advisable to use the default configuration.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→SIP Config→SIP User


Call Config Profile to open the SIP User Call Config Profile tab.

4. Configure according to the default values.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-45.

Figure 3-45 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile

3.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC

Register or unregister the MGC currently connected to the equipment. When the
currently connected MGC is unregistered, the AN5006-20 will disconnect from the
current MGC and automatically connect with the standby MGC. This operation is
applicable to the H.248 protocol.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

90 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→MGC Register/


Unregister to open the MGC Register/Unregister tab.

4. Set the register/unregister status to Register, and the MGC IP address to


192.168.1.1.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-46.

Figure 3-46 Registering / Unregistering the MGC

3.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User

Register or unregister the user port of the POTS card to / from the MGC of the
Softswitch platform. Users can no longer use the port once the port is unregistered.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→NGN User Register/


Unregister to open the NGN User Register/Unregister tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add: dialog box
that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

5. Set the port number to 1, and register/unregister status to Register.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47 Registering / Unregistering the NGN Users

Version: C/1 91
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the voice statistics information.

3.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the signaling
packets between the equipment and the softswitch platform MGC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get Information→Voice Information→Signal Packets Statistic


Information in the Operational Tree to bring up the Signal Packets Statistic
Information tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet

3.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the RTP data flow
transmitted and received by the equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

92 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

3. Select Get Information→Voice Information→Call Statistics Information in


the Operational Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-49 Viewing the Call Statistics Information

3.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream


Port

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the RTP data
stream at the POTS port on the equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get Information→Voice Information→RTP Stream Port Statistics


Information in the Operational Tree to bring up the RTP Stream Port
Statistics Information tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select the POTS card and click OK.

5. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-50.

Version: C/1 93
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 3-50 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port

3.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information

The following introduces how to view the statistics information of calls at the POTS
port on the equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get Information→Voice Information→Call Statistics Information in


the Operational Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select the POTS card and click OK.

5. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-51.

94 Version: C/1
3 Configuring Voice Services

Figure 3-51 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information

Version: C/1 95
4 Configuring Data Services

The following introduces how to start up the data services for the equipment.

Common Configuration

Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent Mode

Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode

Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

96 Version: C/1
4 Configuring Data Services

4.1 Common Configuration

The following introduces the procedures of common configurations on the


equipment to start up data services.

4.1.1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End

Configure the uplink port service VLAN, and set the VLAN ID range for the services
passing the uplink port of the AN5116-06B, so as to identify the services according
to their VLAN IDs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to bring up the Local Service Config-PON service tab from the
menu bar.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Local VLAN→Local


End Service Outer VLAN to open the Local End Service Outer VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End

Version: C/1 97
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.1.2 Adding a Port to the VLAN

After creating the local end service VLAN, you can configure the corresponding
uplink port for the VLAN.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to bring up the Local Service Config-PON service tab from the
menu bar.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Add Slot Port to VLAN
to open the Add Slot Port to VLAN tab.

4. Select the left pane, click Add, enter 1 in the displayed dialog box and then
click OK to add a VLAN configuration entry.

5. Select the right pane, click Add, enter 1 in the dialog box that appears and then
click OK to add a port configuration entry.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click Create on Device to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2 Adding a Port into the VLAN

4.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services


in the Transparent Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of ADSL data service in the
transparent mode.

98 Version: C/1
4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.1 Configuration Rules

u The AN5006-20 equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag,


transparent transmission, 1:1 translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet
frames forwarded from the user end. In this example, we use the transparent
mode.

u When users use the AD64 card as the service interface card, the Ethernet
frames uplinked from the subscriber side are added with the CVLAN Tags via
an intelligent switch or a home gateway. Then the AN5006-20 transparently
transmits the Ethernet frames, adds SVLAN Tags to them, and sends them to
the providers network.

u The user-defined COS value will be invalid in the transparent transmission


mode, and the system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original
messages by default.

4.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

64 PCs are required for the subscriber services. Each PC is connected to one of the
64 ports on the AD64 card provided by the AN5006-20 via a home gateway
uplinked by the ADSL. The home gateway adds a CVLAN TAG (ranging from 100 to
163) to the service from each PC. The AN5006-20 then sends the Ethernet frames
from the 64 subscribers transparently, adds an SVLAN TAG 1000, and finally sends
the services to the provider network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process
takes place.

Version: C/1 99
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Network Diagram

Figure 4-3 Network Diagram of the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.

4.2.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at the subscriber side.
The management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are compulsory.
The planning data are shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


Service Name data
network planning of the operator.

Configuring the outer Configure this item according to the


Starting VLAN ID 1000
VLAN data at the network planning of the operator.
local end Configure this item according to the
Ending VLAN ID 3000
network planning of the operator.

Service Type Select data for the data service. data


Adding ports to the
VLAN ID - 1000
VLAN

100 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

Read only. The default value is


VLAN Type Common VLAN
Common VLAN.
The outlet for the OLT to transmit data
to the upper layer equipment.
Interface No. 19:SFP1
Configure this item according to the
uplink port number actually used.

Configure the tag processing mode for


the uplink service VLAN. Two options
are available: "TAG" and "UNTAG".
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the
port and the packets will be further
transmitted in the untagged mode,
TAG / UNTAG TAG
while the downlink untagged
packets will be added with
corresponding tags when they
pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the
uplink / downlink data packets will
not be processed when they pass
the port.

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator. The
Service Name data1
service name should contain no more
than 30 characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink port
Starting VLAN ID service. The value ranges from 1 to 1000
Configuring the
4085.
uplink service VLAN
The ending VLAN ID of the uplink port
service. The value ranges from 1 to
Ending VLAN ID 1000
4085. The starting VLAN ID should not
be larger than the ending VLAN ID.

The port number of the uplink service


Port No./TRUNK Group ID PON
VLAN or the Trunk group number.

Version: C/1 101


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

Set the uplink service VLAN tag


processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the
Port Tag/Untag tag
uplink port and the packets will be
transmitted in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the
uplink data packets will not be
stripped when they pass the
uplink port.

Configure this item according to the


Profile Name adsl
network planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to the


operator’s network planning; the Adsl2+ Adsl2 G.
Transmission Mode
default setting is Adsl2+Adsl2 G.dmt dmt ReAdsl2
ReAdsl2.
Uplink channel rate mode; three
modes are available: fixed,
upRateMode adaptAtStart
adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime. The
default mode is adaptAtStart.

Downlink channel rate mode; three


modes are available: fixed,
downRateMode adaptAtStart
Configuring the adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime. The
ADSL line profile default mode is adaptAtStart.

Five types are available: NoChannel,


Fast, interleave (by default),
Line Type interleave
FastOrInterleave, and
FastAndInterleave.
The value range is 0 to 100000; the
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value is 0 0
kbit/s.
The value range is 0 to 100000; the
Min Rate Up (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value is 0 0
kbit/s.
SNRM Dn (dB) The default setting is 6.0dB. 6.0
SNRM Up (dB) The default setting is 6.0dB. 6.0

102 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to 31; the unit


Max SNRM Dn (dB) 31
is dB; and the default value is 31dB.
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the unit
Max SNRM Up (dB) 31
is dB; and the default value is 31dB.
The value range is 0 to 31; the unit is
Min SNRM Dn (dB) 0
dB; and the default value is 0.
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the unit
Min SNRM Up (dB) 0
is dB; and the default value is 0dB.
The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms) 16
ms; and the default value is 16.
The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is
Max Interleave Delay Up (ms) 16
ms; and the default value is 16.
The value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol,
Min INP Dn 0 Symbol
and the default value is 0 Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol,


Min INP Up 0 Symbol
and the default value is 0 Symbol.

Enables or disables the downlink bit


Bit Swap Dn swap function. The default value is Disable
Disable.
Enables or disables the uplink bit swap
Bit Swap Up Disable
function. The default value is Disable.
Four power modes are available:
L0Mode, L2Mode, L3Mode,
Power Mode L0Mode
L2AndL3Mode. The default setting is
L0Mode.
The value ranges from 0 to 65534; the
Pm L0 Time (s) unit is second; and the default value is 300
300.
The value ranges from 0 to 65534; the
Pm L2 Time (s) unit is second; and the default value is 30
30.
The value range is 0 to 15; the unit is
Pm L2 Atprt (dB) 3
dB; and the default value is 3.
The value range is 0 to 1024; the unit
Pm L2 Rate (Kbit/s) 32
is kbit/s; and the default value is 32.
Start Frequency Band (tone) / Sets the ToneBlackout band. The
-
End Frequency Band (tone) default setting is null.

Version: C/1 103


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The slot number of the AD64 card that


Slot No. 3
is actually used.
Binding ADSL ports
The port number of the AD64 card in
to the line profile Port No. 1 to 64
actual use.
Profile Id The configured ADSL line profile. adsl
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator. The
PORTRATE.
Profile Name profile name should contain no more
PRF0
than 20 characters. The default profile
name is NULL.
Enables or disables the uplink Policing
US Policing Status status function. The default setting is Enable
Disable.
The value ranges between 64 and
US Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 512
1000000; the unit is kbit/s.
Configuring the port The value ranges from 0 to
rate limiting profile US CBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

The value ranges from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 2000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink


DS Policing Status Policing status function. The default Enable
setting is Disable.

The value ranges between 64 and


DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 8000
1000000; the unit is kbit/s.
The value ranges between 0 and
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the AD64 card that
Slot No. 3
is actually used.
Binding ADSL ports
The port number of the AD64 card in
to the rate limiting Port No. 1 to 64
actual use.
profile
Select the configured rate limiting PORTRATE.
Profile Id
profile. PRF0
Configure this item according to the
Configuring the PVC network planning of the operator. The
Profile Name DEFPVC.PRF
profile maximum length is 20 characters. The
default value is DEFPVC.PRF.

104 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The PVC index number. The value


PVCNO 0
ranges from 0 to 7.

The value ranges from 0 to 255, and


VPI 8
the default value is 8.
The value range is 0 and 32 to 65535;
VCI 35
the default value is 35.
The slot number of the AD64 card that
Slot No. 3
is actually used.
Binding ADSL ports
The port number of the AD64 card in
to the PVC profile Port No. 1 to 64
actual use.
Profile Id Select the configured PVC profile. DEFPVC.PRF
The slot number of the AD64 card that
Slot No. 3
is actually used.

The port number of the AD64 card in


Port Number 1 to 64
actual use.
The PVC in actual use. The value
PVC Index 0
range is 0 to 7.

The service types include unicast and


Service Type multicast. Select unicast for the data Unicast
service.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the transparent
CVLAN mode Transparent
Configuring the port mode and the translation mode are
service VLAN supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation. When


rules are required, this parameter is
CVLAN Rule ID the name of the user-defined rule; NULL
when rules are not required, set this
parameter to null.

TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
CVLAN VLAN ID 100 to 163
4085.
Settings
The CVLAN priority level, ranging from
Priority or
0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest priority 0
COS
level, and 0 the lowest one.

Version: C/1 105


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The stacked VLANs. Configure this


item according to the network planning
QinQ State Enable
of the operator. Select Enable or
Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding services.
This parameter is the name of the
QinQ Rule ID NULL
user-defined rule. When rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.

The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0 to


Priority or
7. 7 stands for the highest priority level, 0
COS
and 0 the lowest one.
QinQ
The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
Settings VLAN ID 1000
4095.
The default
TPID The default setting is 33024.
setting is 33024.

The slot number of the AD64 card that


Slot No. 3
is actually used.
Enabling the ADSL The port number of the AD64 card in
Port No. 1 to 64
ports actual use.
Enables or disables the ADSL port.
Enable Enable
The default setting is "Disable".

The slot number of the AD64 card that


Slot Number 3
is actually used.

The port number of the AD64 card in


Port Number 1 to 64
Enabling the port actual use.
PVC The PVC index number. The value
PVC Index 0
ranges from 0 to 7.

Enables or disables the PVC. The


PVC Enable Enable
default setting is "Disable".

4.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the ADSL service in the transparent mode is shown in
Figure 4-4.

106 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-4 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent Mode

Version: C/1 107


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

Configure the parameters according to the planning data. Refer to Common


Configuration for the configuration procedures.

4.2.6 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ADSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or transmit
data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial Value drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-5.

108 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-5 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode (Completed)

Version: C/1 109


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.2.7 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common Config→PVC Enable. Select the


AD64 card to be configured in the Select object window that appears, and then
click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 4-7.

110 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-7 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Mode

5. Click OK, and the PVCs with the index number 0 of the 64 ports will be set to
Enable in a batch manner.

6. Return to the PVC Enable window, and click the Create on Device button on
the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Port PVC Enabled for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Mode

Version: C/1 111


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.2.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN and divide the services by VLAN IDs.

The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The outer VLAN ID added
to the data service should also be within this range.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Mode

4.2.9 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the ADSL line profile, including parameters such as
the uplink / downlink rate mode and line type.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

112 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


ADSL Line Profile to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new ADSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-10 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode

4.2.10 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set ADSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→ADSL


Port Binding Line Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the ADSL Port
Binding Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

Version: C/1 113


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and
enter 64 in the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

114 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.11 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→Port


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate
limiting profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode

4.2.12 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: C/1 115


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
AD64 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode

4.2.13 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds to
eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one
ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the
subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

116 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→PVC


Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode

4.2.14 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Binding PVC Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile Id in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

Version: C/1 117


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default
values for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 Binding the ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)

118 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.2.15 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Port VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
Selected pane, as shown in Figure 4-19.

Version: C/1 119


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-19 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the "Step"
to the difference between two successive values. The item "Repeat"
refers to the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or CoS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

120 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-21.

Version: C/1 121


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-21 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode

4.2.16 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC64 can access Internet after configuration is completed.

4.3 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services


in the Tag Mode

The following introduces how to configure the ADSL data service in the Tag mode.

4.3.1 Configuration Rules

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example, the Tag mode is configured.

122 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

u When the subscriber uses the AD64 card as the service interface card, the
subscriber's PCs are connected with ports on the interface cards provided by
the equipment through the modems. To be specific, packets from the
subscribers are all untagged. The Ethernet frames are respectively added with
the stacked VLANs by the AN5006-20 and then uplinked to the upper layer
network.

4.3.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

64 PCs are required at the subscriber side. Each PC is connected to the 64 ports on
the AD64 card provided by the AN5006-20. The AN5006-20 adds the Ethernet
frames from the 64 subscribers with a CVLAN TAG 100 to 163 and adds the SVLAN
TAG 1000. After that, the equipment sends the services to the upper-layer network.
In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Network Diagram

The network diagram for the ADSL data service in the Tag mode is shown in
Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Network Diagram of the ADSL Data Service in the Tagged Mode

Version: C/1 123


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Hardware Configuration

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card to provision the data
service in the Tag mode. In the following paragraphs the AD64 card is used as an
example.

4.3.3 Planning Data

The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at the subscriber side.
The management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are compulsory.
The planning data are shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to


Service Name the network planning of the data
operator.

Configure this item according to


Configuring the
Starting VLAN ID the network planning of the 1000
outer VLAN data
operator.
at the local end
Configure this item according to
Ending VLAN ID the network planning of the 3000
operator.

Service Type Select data for the data service. data


VLAN ID - 1000
Read only. The default value is
VLAN Type Common VLAN
Common VLAN.
Adding ports to The outlet for the OLT to
the VLAN transmit data to the upper layer
Interface No. equipment. Configure this item 19:SFP1
according to the uplink port
number actually used.

124 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure the tag processing


mode for the uplink service
VLAN. Two options are
available: "TAG" and "UNTAG".
u In the UNTAG mode, the
tags of the uplink packets
will be stripped
automatically when they
pass the port and the
packets will be further
TAG / UNTAG transmitted in the TAG
untagged mode, while the
downlink untagged
packets will be added with
corresponding tags when
they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags
of the uplink / downlink
data packets will not be
processed when they pass
the port.

Configure this item according to


the network planning of the
Service Name operator. The service name data2
should contain no more than 30
characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the
Starting VLAN ID uplink port service. The value 1000
Configuring the ranges from 1 to 4085.
uplink service The ending VLAN ID of the
VLAN uplink port service. The value
ranges from 1 to 4085. The
Ending VLAN ID 1000
starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
The port number of the uplink
Port No./TRUNK Group ID service VLAN or the Trunk PON
group number.

Version: C/1 125


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Set the uplink service VLAN tag


processing mode. Two options
are available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the
tags of the uplink packets
will be stripped
automatically when they
Port Tag/Untag pass the uplink port and tag
the packets will be
transmitted in the untag
form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of
the uplink data packets will
not be stripped when they
pass the uplink port.

Configure this item according to


Profile Name the network planning of the adsl
operator.

Configure this item according to


the operator’s network Adsl2+ Adsl2 G.
Transmission Mode
planning; the default setting is dmt ReAdsl2
Adsl2+Adsl2 G.dmt ReAdsl2.
Uplink channel rate mode;
three modes are available:
upRateMode fixed, adaptAtStart and adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime. The default
Configuring the mode is adaptAtStart.
ADSL line profile Downlink channel rate mode;
three modes are available:
downRateMode fixed, adaptAtStart and adaptAtStart
adaptAtRuntime. The default
mode is adaptAtStart.

Five types are available:


NoChannel, Fast, interleave (by
Line Type interleave
default), FastOrInterleave, and
FastAndInterleave.
The value range is 0 to 100000;
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 0
value is 0.

126 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value range is 0 to 100000;


Min Rate Up (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 0
value is 0.
SNRM Dn (dB) The default setting is 6.0dB. 6.0
SNRM Up (dB) The default setting is 6.0dB. 6.0
The value ranges from 0 to 31;
Max SNRM Dn (dB) the unit is dB; and the default 31
value is 31dB.
The value ranges from 0 to 31;
Max SNRM Up (dB) the unit is dB; and the default 31
value is 31dB.
The value ranges from 0 to 31;
Min SNRM Dn (dB) the unit is dB; and the default 0
value is 0dB.
The value ranges from 0 to 31;
Min SNRM Up (dB) the unit is dB; and the default 0
value is 0dB.
The value range is 0 to 63; the
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms) unit is ms; and the default value 16
is 16.
The value ranges from 0 to 63;
Max Interleave Delay Up (ms) the unit is ms; and the default 16
value is 16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Min INP Dn Symbol, and the default value 0 Symbol
is 0 Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16


Min INP Up Symbol, and the default value 0 Symbol
is 0 Symbol.

Enables or disables the


Bit Swap Dn downlink bit swap function. The Disable
default value is Disable.
Enables or disables the uplink
Bit Swap Up bit swap function. The default Disable
value is Disable.
Four power modes are
available: L0Mode, L2Mode,
Power Mode L0Mode
L3Mode, L2AndL3Mode. The
default setting is L0Mode.

Version: C/1 127


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to


Pm L0 Time (s) 65534; the unit is second; and 300
the default value is 300.
The value ranges from 0 to
Pm L2 Time (s) 65534; the unit is second; and 30
the default value is 30.
The value range is 0 to 15; the
Pm L2 Atprt (dB) unit is dB; and the default value 3
is 3.
The value range is 0 to 1024;
Pm L2 Rate (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 32
value is 32.
Sets the ToneBlackout band.
ToneBlackoutSet -
The default setting is null.

The slot number of the AD64


Slot No. 3
card that is actually used.
Binding ADSL
The port number of the AD64
ports to the line Port No. 1 to 64
card in actual use.
profile
The configured ADSL line
Profile Id adsl
profile.

Configure this item according to


the network planning of the
operator. The profile name PORTRATE.
Profile Name
should contain no more than 20 PRF0
characters. The default profile
name is NULL.
Enables or disables the uplink
US Policing Status Policing status function. The Enable
default setting is Disable.
Configuring the
port rate limiting The value ranges between 64
US Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 512
profile and 1000000; the unit is kbit/s.
The value ranges from 0 to
US CBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

The value ranges from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 2000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the


downlink Policing status
DS Policing Status Enable
function. The default setting is
Disable.

128 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges between 64


DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 8000
and 1000000; the unit is kbit/s.
The value ranges between 0
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
and 16777215; the unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the AD64
Slot No. 3
card that is actually used.
Binding ADSL
The port number of the AD64
ports to the rate Port No. 1 to 64
card in actual use.
limiting profile
Select the configured rate PORTRATE.
Profile Id
limiting profile. PRF0
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
Profile Name operator. The maximum length DEFPVC.PRF
is 20 characters. The default
value is DEFPVC.PRF.
Configuring the
The PVC index number. The
PVC profile PVCNO 0
value ranges from 0 to 7.

The value ranges from 0 to 255,


VPI 8
and the default value is 8.
The value range is 0 and 32 to
VCI 35
65535; the default value is 35.
The slot number of the AD64
Slot No. 3
card that is actually used.
Binding ADSL
The port number of the AD64
ports to the PVC Port No. 1 to 64
card in actual use.
profile
Select the configured PVC
Profile Id DEFPVC.PRF
profile.

The slot number of the AD64


Slot No. 3
card that is actually used.

The port number of the AD64


Port Number 1 to 64
Configuring the card in actual use.
port service The PVC in actual use. The
PVC Index 0
VLAN value range is 0 to 7.

The service types include


Service Type unicast and multicast. Select Unicast
unicast for the data service.

Version: C/1 129


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure the CVLAN mode for


this service; the tag mode, the
CVLAN Mode TAG
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation.


When rules are required, this
parameter is the name of the
CVLAN Rule ID NULL
user-defined rule; when rules
are not required, set this
parameter to null.

TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1
VLAN ID 100 to 163
to 4085.
CVLAN Settings
The CVLAN priority level,
ranging from 0 to 7. 7 stands for
Priority or COS 0
the highest priority level, and 0
the lowest one.
The stacked VLANs. Configure
this item according to the
QinQ State network planning of the Enable
operator. Select Enable or
Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding
services. This parameter is the
QinQ Rule ID name of the user-defined rule. NULL
When rules are not required,
set this parameter to null.

The SVLAN priority, ranging


from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the
Priority or COS 0
highest priority level, and 0 the
lowest one.
QinQ Settings
The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1
VLAN ID 1000
to 4095.
The default
TPID The default setting is 33024.
setting is 33024.

The slot number of the AD64


Slot No. 3
Enabling the card that is actually used.
ADSL ports The port number of the AD64
Port No. 1 to 64
card in actual use.

130 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enables or disables the ADSL


Enable port. The default setting is Enable
"Disable".
The slot number of the AD64
Slot Number 3
card that is actually used.

The port number of the AD64


Port Number 1 to 64
Enabling the port card in actual use.
PVC The PVC index number. The
PVC Index 0
value ranges from 0 to 7.

Enables or disables the PVC.


PVC Enable Enable
The default setting is "Disable".

4.3.4 Configuration Flow

The flow for configuring the ADSL data service in the Tag mode is shown in
Figure 4-23.

Version: C/1 131


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-23 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode

132 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

Configure the parameters according to the planning data. Refer to Common


Configuration for the configuration procedures.

4.3.6 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ADSL port. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when
disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial Value drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-24.

Version: C/1 133


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-24 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Completed)

134 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.3.7 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common Config→PVC Enable. Select the


AD64 card to be configured in the Select object window that appears, and then
click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner in the Tag Mode

Version: C/1 135


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Click OK, and the PVCs with the index number 0 of the 64 ports will be set to
Enable in a batch manner.

6. Return to the PVC Enable window, and click the Create on Device button on
the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27 The Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN and divide the services by VLAN IDs.

The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The outer VLAN ID added
to the data service should also be within this range.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-28.

136 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-28 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.9 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the ADSL line profile, including parameters such as
the uplink / downlink rate mode and line type.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


ADSL Line Profile to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new ADSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.10 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set ADSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Version: C/1 137


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→ADSL


Port Binding Line Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the ADSL Port
Binding Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and
enter 64 in the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 4-30.

Figure 4-30 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-31.

138 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-31 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode (Completed)

4.3.11 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds to
eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one
ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the
subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→PVC


Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-32.

Version: C/1 139


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-32 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.12 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Binding PVC Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile Id in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values
for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-33.

140 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-33 Binding the ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-34 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
(Completed)

Version: C/1 141


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.3.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→Port


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate
limiting profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-35 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

4.3.14 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

142 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
AD64 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-36.

Figure 4-36 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode

4.3.15 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Port VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 4-37.

Version: C/1 143


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-37 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
"Selected" pane, as shown in Figure 4-38.

144 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-38 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the "Step"
to the difference between two successive values. The item "Repeat"
refers to the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or CoS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

Version: C/1 145


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-39.

Figure 4-39 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-40.

146 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-40 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Tag Mode

4.3.16 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC64 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

4.4 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data


Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the VDSL data service in the 1:1
translation mode.

Version: C/1 147


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.4.1 Configuration Rules

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example the 1:1 translation mode is configured.

u When the VD32 card is used as the service interface card, the Ethernet frame
uplinked from the subscriber side is added with the VLAN Tag via the user’s
intelligent switch or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And then the
VLAN ID is translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment; each user
VLAN ID is translated into a different VLAN ID. After that, the service is added
with the SVLAN Tag and transmitted to the upper layer network.

u The user-defined COS value will be invalid in the 1:1 translation mode, and the
system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original messages by
default.

4.4.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

32 PCs are required at the subscriber side. Each PC is connected to one of the 32
ports on the VD32 card provided by the AN5006-20 via a home gateway using the
VDSL. The home gateway adds a CVLAN Tag (ranging from 100 to 131) to the
service from each PC. The AN5006-20 translates the Ethernet frames from the 32
subscribers into CVLAN Tags 200 to 231, adds the SVLAN Tag 1000, and finally
transmits to the provider network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process
takes place.

148 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Network Diagram

Figure 4-41 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Hardware Configuration

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64 or VD32 card to provision the data service
in the 1:1 translation mode. In the following paragraphs the VD32 card is used as an
example.

4.4.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card in Slot 2 of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at the
subscriber side. The management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card
are compulsory cards. The planning data are shown in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


Service Name data
network planning of the operator.

Configuring the Configure this item according to the


Starting VLAN ID 1000
outer VLAN data network planning of the operator.
at the local end Configure this item according to the
Ending VLAN ID 3000
network planning of the operator.

Service Type Select data for the data service. data

Version: C/1 149


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


Slot No. 1
actual situations.
Configure this item according to the
Port No. 1
actual situations.
Starting VLAN ID - 200
Ending VLAN ID - 200
Configure the tag processing mode
for the uplink service VLAN. Two
options are available: "TAG" and
"UNTAG".
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags
Adding ports to of the uplink packets will be
the VLAN stripped automatically when
they pass the port and the
packets will be further
TAG / UNTAG TAG
transmitted in the untagged
mode, while the downlink
untagged packets will be
added with corresponding tags
when they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of
the uplink / downlink data
packets will not be processed
when they pass the port.

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator.
Service Name data3
The service name should contain
no more than 30 characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink
Starting VLAN ID port service. The value range is 1 1000
Configuring the to 4085.
uplink service The ending VLAN ID of the uplink
VLAN port service. The value range is 1
Ending VLAN ID to 4085. The starting VLAN ID 1000
should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.

The port number of the uplink


Port No./TRUNK Group ID service VLAN or the Trunk group PON
number.

150 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Set the uplink service VLAN tag


processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
Port Tag/Untag they pass the uplink port and tag
the packets will be transmitted
in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of
the uplink data packets will not
be stripped when they pass
the uplink port.

Configure this item according to the


Profile Name vdline
network planning of the operator.

The data encapsulation mode.


When the equipment is connected
Port Mode with the ADSL Modem, select ATM; PTM
otherwise select PTM. The options
include ATM, PTM and ADAPT.
The equipment supports eight
standard profiles (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D,
12A, 12B, 17A and 30A) and the

Configuring the comprehensive application mode

VDSL line basic ALL, so as to improve its

profile adaptability to complex scenarios.


The digital number in the value
stands for the maximum cut-off
Standard Profile frequency, while the letter stands ALL
for the power features. For
example, 17A means that the
maximum cut-off frequency is 17
MHz and the maximum downlink
Tx power is +14.5 dBm.
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
The default setting is ALL.

Version: C/1 151


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Defines the Tx power at each


frequency point. Each group of
definitions makes up a power
spectrum, including A_EU_128, B8_11_
Psd Shape B7_BT_ANFP, C_138_b, etc. 998ADE17_M2x_
Configure this item according to the A
network planning of the operator.
The default setting is B8_11_
998ADE17_M2x_A.

The value ranges is 0.0 to 25.5


(unit: dBm), accurate to one
MaxTxPowerDn (dBm) 20.5
decimal place. The default setting
is 20.5 dBm.
The value ranges is 0.0 to 20.2
(unit: dBm), accurate to one
MaxTxPowerUp (dBm) 14.5
decimal place. The default setting
is 14.5 dBm.
Set the start frequency band and
end frequency band for the RFI
RFI Set -
notch according to the actual
condition.
Set the filtering starting and ending
ToneBlackout Set -
bands as required.

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
actually used.
Binding VDSL
The port number of the VD32 card
ports to the VDSL Port No. 1 to 32
actually used.
line basic profile
Select the configured basic VDSL
VDSL Line Profile vdline
line profile.

Configure this item according to the


Profile Name vdservice
network planning of the operator.

The options include fixed,


upRateMode adaptAtStart
Configuring the adaptAtStart, and adaptAtRuntime.
VDSL service The options include fixed,
downRateMode adaptAtStart
profile adaptAtStart, and adaptAtRuntime.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Target SNRM Dn (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 6.0
place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.

152 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The options include user define


MaxSNRMDnMode and unlimited. The default setting is User define
"user define".
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal
Max SNRM Dn (dB) 31.0
place. The default setting is 31.0
dB.
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
Min SNRM Dn (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 0.0
place. The default setting is 0.0 dB.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Target SNRM Up (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 6.0
place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.

The options include user define


MaxSNRMUpMode and unlimited. The default setting is User define
"user define".
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal
Max SNRM Up (dB) 31.0
place. The default setting is 31.0
dB.
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
Min SNRM Up (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 0.0
place. The default setting is 0.0 dB.

The value range is 64 to 200000;


Max Rate Dn (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 128000
value is 128000.
The value range is 0 to 200000; the
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value 64
is 64.
The value range is 64 to 200000;
Max Rate Up (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 128000
value is 128000.
The value range is 0 to 200000; the
Min Rate Down (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value 64
is 64.
The value ranges from 0 to 63; the
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms) unit is ms; and the default value is 16
16ms.

Version: C/1 153


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value range is 0 to 63; the unit


Max Interleave Delay Up (ms) 16
is ms; and the default value is 16.
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Min INP Dn Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16


Min INP Up Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
actually used.
Binding VDSL
The port number of the VD32 card
ports to the VDSL Port No. 1 to 32
actually used.
service profile
Select the configured VDSL service
VDSL Service Profile vdservice
profile.

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator.
PORTRATE.
Profile name The profile name should contain no
PRF0
more than 20 characters. The
default profile name is NULL.

Enables or disables the uplink


US Policing Status Policing status function. The Enable
default setting is Disable.

The value ranges between 64 and


US Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 512
Configuring the 1000000; the unit is kbit/s.

port rate limiting The value ranges from 0 to


US CBS (Byte) 20000
profile 4294967294; the unit is Byte.

The value ranges from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink


DS Policing Status Policing status function. The Enable
default setting is Disable.

The value ranges between 64 and


DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 8000
1000000; the unit is kbit/s.
The value ranges between 0 and
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.
Binding VDSL
The slot number of the VD32 card
ports to the rate Slot No. 2
actually used.
limiting profile

154 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The port number of the VD32 card


Port No. 1 to 32
actually used.

Select the configured rate limiting PORTRATE.


Profile Id
profile. PRF0
The slot number of the VD32 card
Slot No. 2
actually used.

The port number of the VD32 card


Port Number 1 to 32
actually used.

The PVC in actual use. The value


PVC Index 0
range is 0 to 7.

The service types include unicast


Service Type and multicast. Select unicast for the Unicast
data service.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the
CVLAN Mode Translation
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation.


Configuring the When rules are required, this
port service CVLAN Rule ID parameter is the name of the user- NULL
VLAN defined rule; when rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.

TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024


The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 100 to 163
CVLAN Settings 4085.
The CVLAN priority level, ranging
Priority or COS from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest 0
priority level, and 0 the lowest one.

The VLAN ID after translation; the


VLAN ID 200 to 231
value ranges from 1 to 4095.

The translation priority level. The


Translation
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands
VLAN Settings Priority or COS 0
for the highest priority while 0 the
lowest one.
TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024

Version: C/1 155


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The stacked VLANs. Configure this


item according to the network
QinQ State Enable
planning of the operator. Select
Enable or Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding
services. This parameter is the
QinQ Rule ID name of the user-defined rule. NULL
When rules are not required, set
this parameter to null.

Priority or COS The default setting is 33024. 33024


The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 100 to 163
4085.
QinQ Settings
The CVLAN priority level, ranging
TPID from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest 0
priority level, and 0 the lowest one.

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
actually used.

Enabling the The port number of the VD32 card


Port No. 1 to 32
VDSL port actually used.

Enables or disables the VDSL port.


Enable Enable
The default setting is "Disable".

4.4.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL data service in the 1:1 translation mode is
shown in Figure 4-42.

156 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-42 Flow of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode

Version: C/1 157


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.4.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

Configure the parameters according to the planning data. Refer to Common


Configuration for the configuration procedures.

4.4.6 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the VDSL ports. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when
disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial Value drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-43.

158 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-43 Enabling VDSL Ports for VDSL Services in the 1:1 Translation Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-44.

Figure 4-44 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode
(Completed)

Version: C/1 159


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.4.7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN to identify the services according to their VLAN
IDs.

The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The outer VLAN ID added
into the data service must be within this range.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the "Operational Tree" pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service


VLAN to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-45.

Figure 4-45 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

4.4.8 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, such as the port mode,
power spectrum profile, and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.

Precautions

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

160 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the
VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the
PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at
the port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


VDSL Line Basic Profile to bring up the VDSL Line Basic Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-46.

Figure 4-46 Configuring the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

4.4.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL line basic profile, and the ports will control
the data stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the
profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: C/1 161


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→VD


Port Bind Basic Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Basic Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.10 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile

Configure the VDSL service profile, and set the parameters including the uplink /
downlink rate mode and the uplink / downlink maximum / minimum rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


VDSL Service Profile to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.

162 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL service
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-48.

Figure 4-48 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode

4.4.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL service profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→VD


Port Bind Service Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Service Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line VDSL Service
Profile in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select vdservice from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click "OK".

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-49.

Version: C/1 163


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-49 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.12 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→Port


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate
limiting profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-50.

164 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-50 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode

4.4.13 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
VD32 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-51.

Version: C/1 165


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-51 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.4.14 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Port VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select all the 32 ports, as shown in Figure 4-52.

166 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-52 Selecting the Ports in the 1:1 Translation Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the "Selected" pane, as
shown in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

Version: C/1 167


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the "Step"
to the difference between two successive values. The item "Repeat"
refers to the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or CoS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-54.

168 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-54 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the 1:1 Translation Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-55.

Version: C/1 169


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-55 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the 1:1 Translation Mode

4.4.15 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC32 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

4.5 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data


Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the VDSL data service in the N:1
translation mode.

4.5.1 Configuration Rules

u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. The example is configured in the N:1 translation mode.

170 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

u When the VD32 card is used as the service interface card, the Ethernet frame
uplinked from the subscriber side is added with the VLAN Tag via the user’s
intelligent switch or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And then the
VLAN ID is translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment; each user
VLAN ID is translated into the same VLAN ID. After that, the service is added
with the SVLAN Tag and transmitted to the upper layer network.

u The user-configured COS value is invalid in the N:1 translation mode, and the
system uses the COS value of the tag in the original messages by default.

4.5.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The two PCs are required at the subscriber side. The two are connected to Port 1 on
the VD32 card provided by the AN5006-20 via a home gateway using the VDSL.
The home gateway adds a CVLAN Tag (100 or 101) to the service from each PC.
The AN5006-20 translates the Ethernet frames from the 2 subscribers into CVLAN
Tag 200, and then adds the SVLAN Tag 1000 to transmit them to the upper level
network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Network Diagram

The network of the VDSL data service in the N:1 translation mode is shown
Figure 4-56.

Figure 4-56 Network Diagram of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

Version: C/1 171


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can use the AD32, AD64 or VD32 card to provision the data service
in the N:1 translation mode. In the following paragraphs the VD32 card is used as
an example.

4.5.3 Planning Data

The VD32 card in Slot 2 of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at the
subscriber side. The management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card
are compulsory cards. The planning data are shown in Table 4-4.

Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to the


Service Name data
network planning of the operator.

Configuring the Configure this item according to the


Starting VLAN ID 1000
outer VLAN data network planning of the operator.
at the local end Configure this item according to the
Ending VLAN ID 3000
network planning of the operator.

Service Type Select NGN for VoIP services. Data


Configure this item according to the
Slot No. 1
actual situations.

Adding ports to Configure this item according to the


Port No. 1
the VLAN actual situations.
Starting VLAN ID - 200
Ending VLAN ID - 200

172 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure the tag processing mode


for the uplink service VLAN. Two
options are available: "TAG" and
"UNTAG".
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
they pass the port and the
packets will be further
TAG / UNTAG TAG
transmitted in the untagged
mode, while the downlink
untagged packets will be added
with corresponding tags when
they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of
the uplink / downlink data
packets will not be processed
when they pass the port.

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator.
Service Name data4
The service name should contain no
more than 30 characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink
Starting VLAN ID port service. The value range is 1 to 1000
Configuring the 4085.
uplink service The ending VLAN ID of the uplink
VLAN port service. The value range is 1 to
Ending VLAN ID 4085. The starting VLAN ID should 1000
not be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
The port number of the uplink
Port No./TRUNK Group ID service VLAN or the Trunk group PON
number.

Version: C/1 173


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Set the uplink service VLAN tag


processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
Port Tag/Untag they pass the uplink port and tag
the packets will be transmitted
in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the
uplink data packets will not be
stripped when they pass the
uplink port.

Configure this item according to the


Profile Name vdline
network planning of the operator.

The data encapsulation mode.


When the equipment is connected
Port Mode with the ADSL Modem, select ATM; PTM
otherwise select PTM. The options
include ATM, PTM and ADAPT.
The equipment supports eight
standard profiles (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D,
12A, 12B, 17A and 30A) and the
Configuring the comprehensive application mode
VDSL line basic ALL, so as to improve its adaptability
profile to complex scenarios. The digital
number in the value stands for the
maximum cut-off frequency, while
Standard Profile ALL
the letter stands for the power
features. For example, 17A means
that the maximum cut-off frequency
is 17 MHz and the maximum
downlink Tx power is +14.5 dBm.
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
The default setting is ALL.

174 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Defines the Tx power at each


frequency point. Each group of
definitions makes up a power
spectrum, including A_EU_128, B7_
B8_11_
Psd Shape BT_ANFP, C_138_b, etc.
998ADE17_M2x_A
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
The default setting is B8_11_
998ADE17_M2x_A.

The value ranges is 0.0 to 25.5 (unit:


dBm), accurate to one decimal
MaxTxPowerDn (dBm) 20.5
place. The default setting is 20.5
dBm.
The value ranges is 0.0 to 20.2 (unit:
dBm), accurate to one decimal
MaxTxPowerUp (dBm) 14.5
place. The default setting is 14.5
dBm.
Set the start frequency band and
end frequency band for the RFI
RFI Set -
notch according to the actual
condition.
Set the filtering starting and ending
ToneBlackout Set -
bands as required.

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
Binding VDSL actually used.

ports to the The port number of the VD32 card


Port No. 1
VDSL line basic actually used.
profile Select the configured basic VDSL
VDSL Line Profile vdline
line profile.

Configure this item according to the


Profile Name vdservice
network planning of the operator.

The options include fixed,


upRateMode adaptAtStart
Configuring the adaptAtStart, and adaptAtRuntime.
VDSL service The options include fixed,
downRateMode adaptAtStart
profile adaptAtStart, and adaptAtRuntime.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Target SNRM Dn (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 6.0
place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.

Version: C/1 175


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The options include user define and


MaxSNRMDnMode unlimited. The default setting is User define
"user define".
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
Max SNRM Dn (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 31.0
place. The default setting is 31.0 dB.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Min SNRM Dn (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 0.0
place. The default setting is 0.0 dB.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Target SNRM Up (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 6.0
place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.

The options include user define and


MaxSNRMUpMode unlimited. The default setting is User define
"user define".
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
Max SNRM Up (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 31.0
place. The default setting is 31.0 dB.

The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0


Min SNRM Up (dB) (unit: dB), accurate to one decimal 0.0
place. The default setting is 0.0 dB.

The value range is 64 to 200000; the


Max Rate Dn (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value is 128000
128000.
The value range is 0 to 200000; the
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value is 64
64.
The value range is 64 to 200000; the
Max Rate Up (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value is 128000
128000.
The value range is 0 to 200000; the
Min Rate Down (Kbit/s) unit is kbit/s; and the default value is 64
64.
The value ranges from 0 to 63; the
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms) unit is ms; and the default value is 16
16ms.
The value ranges from 0 to 63; the
Max Interleave Delay Up (ms) unit is ms; and the default value is 16
16ms.

176 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to 16


Min INP Dn Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

The value ranges from 0 to 16


Min INP Up Symbol, and the default value is 0 0 Symbol
Symbol.

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
Binding VDSL actually used.

ports to the The port number of the VD32 card


Port No. 1
VDSL service actually used.
profile Select the configured VDSL service
VDSL Service Profile vdservice
profile.

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator.
Profile name The profile name should contain no PORTRATE.PRF0
more than 20 characters. The
default profile name is NULL.

Enables or disables the uplink


US Policing Status Policing status function. The default Enable
setting is Disable.

The value ranges between 64 and


US Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 512
Configuring the 1000000; the unit is kbit/s.

port rate limiting The value ranges from 0 to


US CBS (Byte) 20000
profile 4294967294; the unit is Byte.

The value ranges from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; the unit is Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink


DS Policing Status Policing status function. The default Enable
setting is Disable.

The value ranges between 64 and


DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s) 8000
1000000; the unit is kbit/s.
The value ranges between 0 and
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.
The slot number of the VD32 card
Binding VDSL Slot No. 2
actually used.
ports to the rate
The port number of the VD32 card
limiting profile Port No. 1
actually used.

Version: C/1 177


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select the configured rate limiting


Profile Id PORTRATE.PRF0
profile.

The slot number of the VD32 card


Slot No. 2
actually used.

The port number of the VD32 card


Port Number 1
actually used.

The PVC in actual use. The value


PVC Index 0
range is 0 to 7.

The service types include unicast


Service type and multicast. Select unicast for the Unicast
data service.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the
CVLAN mode Translation
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.

Rules of the CVLAN translation.


When rules are required, this
CVLAN Rule ID parameter is the name of the user- NULL
Configuring the defined rule; when rules are not
port service required, set this parameter to null.
VLAN TPID The default value is 33024. 33024
The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 100 to 131
CVLAN 4085.
Settings The CVLAN priority level, ranging
Priority or COS from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest 0
priority level, and 0 the lowest one.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID after translation; the


200
value ranges from 1 to 4085.

The translation priority level. The


Translation
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands
VLAN Settings Priority or COS 0
for the highest priority while 0 the
lowest one.
TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024
The stacked VLANs. Configure this
item according to the network
QinQ State Enable
planning of the operator. Select
Enable or Disable.

178 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Table 4-4 Planning Data for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The QinQ rules for binding services.


This parameter is the name of the
QinQ Rule ID user-defined rule. When rules are NULL
not required, set this parameter to
null.
The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0
Priority or COS to 7. 7 stands for the highest priority 0
level, and 0 the lowest one.
QinQ Settings
The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 1000
4085.
TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024
The slot number of the VD32 card
Slot No. 2
actually used.

Enabling the The port number of the VD32 card


Port No. 1
VDSL port actually used.

Enables or disables the VDSL port.


Enable Enable
The default setting is "Disable".

4.5.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL data service in the N:1 translation mode is
shown in Figure 4-57.

Version: C/1 179


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-57 Flow of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

180 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

4.5.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

Configure the parameters according to the planning data. Refer to Common


Configuration for the configuration procedures.

4.5.6 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the VDSL ports. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the entry of port No.1, and select Enable in the drop-down list of the
ENABLEFLAG.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode
(Completed)

Version: C/1 181


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

4.5.7 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN to identify the services according to their VLAN
IDs.

The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The outer VLAN ID added
to the data service should also be within this range.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode

4.5.8 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, such as the port mode,
power spectrum profile, and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.

Precautions

u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.

182 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the
VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the
PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at
the port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


VDSL Line Basic Profile to bring up the VDSL Line Basic Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-60.

Figure 4-60 Configuring the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode

4.5.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL line basic profile, and the ports will control
the data stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the
profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: C/1 183


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→VD


Port Bind Basic Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Basic Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)

4.5.10 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile

Configure the VDSL service profile, and set the parameters including the uplink /
downlink rate mode and the uplink / downlink maximum / minimum rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

184 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


VDSL Service Profile to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL service
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-62.

Figure 4-62 Configuring the VDSL Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode

4.5.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile

Bind designated ports to the set VDSL service profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→VD


Port Bind Service Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Service Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line VDSL Service
Profile in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select vdservice from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click "OK". .

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-63.

Version: C/1 185


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-63 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.5.12 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→Port


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate
limiting profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-64.

186 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-64 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode

4.5.13 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
VD32 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-65.

Version: C/1 187


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 4-65 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode (Completed)

4.5.14 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Port VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and select the line with the Port Number 1 in the
upper-right pane.

5. Click Add, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box
that appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

6. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-66.

188 Version: C/1


4 Configuring Data Services

Figure 4-66 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the N:1 Translation Mode

4.5.15 Configuration Result

PC1 and PC2 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

Version: C/1 189


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

The following introduces how to access the G.SHDSL service in the ATM and TDM
modes for the equipment.

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM (Local Mode)

Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service - SHDSL Circuit Emulation


Service Based on TDM

Configuring the G.SHDSL Service - Circuit Emulation Service Based on E1

190 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service


Based on ATM

The following introduces how to configure the G.SHDSL service in the transparent
transmission mode based on ATM.

5.1.1 Configuration Rules

ATM is a packet switch and multiplex technology based on cell. It is applicable in


LAN and WAN, with the features of fixed-length cell, connection-oriented, and good
real time performance, suitable for for the applications with high bandwidth, low
delay, and high data burst rate.

When users use the HD32A card as the service interface card, the Ethernet frames
uplinked from the subscriber side are added with the CVLAN Tags via an intelligent
switch or a CPE uplinked with the SHDSL. Then the AN5006-20 transparently
transmits the Ethernet frames, adds SVLAN Tags to them, and uplinks them to the
providers network.

5.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

31 PCs are required at the subscriber side. Each PC is connected to one of the 32
ports on the HD32A card provided by the AN5006-20 via a home gateway using the
DSL (among them, ports 1 and 2 provide a higher bandwidth for PC1 in the bound
group mode). The home gateway adds a CVLAN tag (ranging from 800 to 830) to
the service from each PC. The AN5006-20 then sends the Ethernet frames from the
32 subscribers transparently and adds the SVLAN tag 1000, and finally sends the
services to the provider network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process
takes place.

Version: C/1 191


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Network Diagram

Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

Hardware Configuration

G.SHDSL supports multiple service types, such as ATM, TDM, etc. To implement G.
SHDSL services in the ATM transparent mode, the HD32A card should be used for
the AN5006-20.

5.1.3 Planning Data

The HD32A card in Slot 4 of the AN5006-20 acts as the subscriber side interface
card, and the management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are
compulsory. The planning data are shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the


Slot No. management control card in actual 5
use.

Configuring the The port number of the


uplink port management control card in actual
Uplink Port No. PON
attributes use, including the GE1, GE2, GE3,
and GE4 uplink ports.

The port type of the uplink card that


Port Type GE port
is actually used.

192 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enables or disables the auto


negotiation function of the uplink
Auto-negotiation Enable
port, whereas this function cannot
be disabled at the 10GE port.

The port rate of the uplink port. The


default values of the 10GE and GE
Port Rate 1000Mbps
ports are 10000 Mbps and 1000
Mbps respectively.

The duplex mode of the uplink port,


Port duplex mode including full duplex and half duplex. Full duplex
Full duplex is the default value.

Enables or disables the flow control


function of the uplink port. It is
enabled when this item is selected,
Port flow control Disable
and disabled when this item is
cleared. The default setting is
Disable.
Enables or disables the address
learning function of the uplink port. It
Port address learning is enabled when this item is Enable
selected, and disabled when this
item is cleared. Enabled by default.

Enables or disables the priority


function of the uplink port. It is
Port priority enabled when this item is selected, Enable
and disabled when this item is
cleared. Enabled by default.

The service priority value of the


uplink port, ranging from 0 to 7. 7
Port priority value stands for the highest priority level, 0
and 0 the lowest level. The default
value is 0.

Version: C/1 193


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The interface mode of the uplink


port, including SerDes and SGMII.
The default value is SerDes.
SerDes should be configured if the
uplink port is using an optical
Interface mode SerDes
module or a compulsory GE
electrical module. SGMII should be
configured if the uplink port is using
a 10/100/1000Mbps electrical
module.
The slot number of the HD32A card
Slot No. 4
in actual use.
Enabling the The port number of the HD32A card
Port No. 1 to 32
SHDSL port in actual use.
Enables or disables the SHDSL
Enable Enable
port. The default setting is Disable.

The slot number of the HD32A card


Slot Number 4
in actual use.
The port number of the HD32A card
Port No. 1 to 32
Enabling the Port in actual use.
PVC The PVC index number. The value
PVCNO 0
ranges from 0 to 7.

PVC enable or PVC disable. The


PVC Enable Enable
default value is Disable.
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
Service Name Data
The service name should contain
no more than 30 characters.
The starting VLAN ID of the uplink
Starting VLAN ID port service. The value range is 1 to 1000
Configuring the 4095.
Uplink Service The ending VLAN ID of the uplink
VLAN port service. The value ranges from
Ending VLAN ID 1 to 4095. The starting VLAN ID 1000
should not be larger than the ending
VLAN ID.
The port number of the uplink
Port No. / Trunk Group ID service VLAN or the Trunk ground 5:PON
number.

194 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The uplink service VLAN tag


processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
Port Tag / Untag they pass the uplink port and tag
the packets will be transmitted
in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the
uplink data packets will not be
stripped when they pass the
uplink port.

Configure this item according to the


Line profile name ShdslATM
network planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to the


Port Mode network planning of the operator. ATM
The options include ATM and TDM.

Configure this item according to the


network planning of the operator.
Line encoding type PAM32
The options include PAM16,
PAM32, and AUTO.
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
Transmission Mode Annex B
Configuring an The options include Annex A and
SHDSL line Annex B.
profile The value range is -10 to 21; the
Downlink target signal-to-noise
unit is dB; and the default value is 6 6
ratio (DB)
dB.
The value ranges from -10 to 21;
Downlink assured signal-to-noise
the unit is dB; and the default value 3
ratio (DB)
is 3dB.
The value range is -10 to 21; the
Uplink target signal-to-noise ratio
unit is dB; and the default value is 6 6
(DB)
dB.
The value ranges from -10 to 21;
Uplink assured signal-to-noise ratio
the unit is dB; and the default value 3
(DB)
is 3dB.

Version: C/1 195


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enables or disables the line


Line Detect Switch detection function. The default Disable
value is Disable.
The slot number of the HD32A card
Binding an Slot No. 4
in actual use.
SHDSL port to
The port number of the HD32A card
the SHDS line Port No. 1 to 32
in actual use.
profile
SHDSL Line Profile The configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslATM
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
Profile Name The maximum length is 20 DEFPVC.PRF
characters. The default value is
DEFPVC.PRF.
Configuring the
The PVC index number. The value
PVC profile PVCNO 0
range is from 0 to 7.

The value ranges from 0 to 255, and


VPI 8
the default value is 8.
The value ranges is 0, from 32 to
VCI 35
65535, and the default value is 35.
The slot number of the HD32A card
Slot No. 4
Binding an in actual use.
SHDSL Port to The port number of the HD32A card
Port No. 1 to 32
the PVC Profile in actual use.
Profile Id Select the configured PVC profile. DEFPVC.PRF
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
Profile name The profile name should contain no PORTRATE.PRF0
more than 20 characters. The
default profile name is NULL.

Configuring the Enables or disables the uplink


port rate limiting US Policing Status Policing status function. The default Enable
profile value is Disable.
The value range is 64 to 1000000;
US Policing CIR (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 51200
value is 64 kbit/s.
The value ranges from 0 to
US CBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; unit: Byte.

196 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The value ranges from 0 to


US EBS (Byte) 20000
4294967294; unit: Byte.

Enables or disables the downlink


DS Policing Status Policing status function. The default Enable
value is Disable.
The value range is 64 to 1000000;
DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s) the unit is kbit/s; and the default 51200
value is 64 kbit/s.
The value ranges from 0 to
DS PIR (Kbit/s) 10240
16777215; unit: kbit/s.
The slot number of the HD32A card
Slot No. 4
Binding an in actual use.
SHDSL port to The port number of the HD32A card
Port No. 1 to 32
the rate limiting in actual use.
profile Select the configured rate limiting
Profile ID PORTRATE.PRF0
profile.

This ID is automatically generated


Line Bound Group ID -
by the system.

The slot number of the HD32A card


Configuring the Slot No. 4
in actual use.
group bound with
Configure this item according to the
the SHDSL port Master Port No. 1
network planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to the


Slave Port No. 2
network planning of the operator.

The slot number of the HD32A card


Slot No. 4
in actual use.
The port number of the HD32A card
Port No. 1 to 32
in actual use.
The PVC in actual use. The value
PVCNO 0
Configuring the range is from 0 to 7.
port service The service types include unicast
VLAN Service Type and multicast. The data service is Unicast
unicast.
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the
CVLAN Mode Transparent
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.

Version: C/1 197


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-1 Planning Data of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Rules of the CVLAN translation.


When rules are required, this
CVLAN Rule ID parameter is the name of the user- null
defined rule; when rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.

TPID The default value is 33024. 33024


The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 800 to 830
4095.
CVLAN Settings
The CVLAN priority level. The value
ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the
Priority or COS 0
highest priority while 0 is the lowest
priority.

The stacked VLANs. Configure this


item according to the network
QinQ State Enable
planning of the operator. Select
Enable or Disable.
The QinQ rules for binding services.
This parameter is the name of the
QinQ Rule ID user-defined rule. When rules are null
not required, set this parameter to
null.
The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0
to 7. 7 stands for the highest priority
Priority or COS 0
level, and 0 stands for the lowest
QinQ Settings one.
The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
VLAN ID 1000
4095.
TPID 33024 33024

5.1.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the G.SHDSL service in the ATM transparent mode is shown
in Figure 5-2.

198 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode

Version: C/1 199


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.1.5 Configuring the uplink port attributes

Configure the uplink port attributes, including parameters such as auto-negotiation


switch, the port flow control, and the port priority.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Ethernet Port to


open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode

5.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

200 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial Value drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Ports for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-5.

Version: C/1 201


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-5 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode
(Completed)

5.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC

Enable the port PVC.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree, select Common Config→PVC Enable. Select the


HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object window that appears, and
then click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 5-6.

202 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-6 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner - G.SHDSL Service
Configuration

5. Click OK and return to the PVC Enable window. Click the Write to Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode (Completed)

Version: C/1 203


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.1.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN and divide the services by VLAN IDs.

The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4095. The outer VLAN ID added
to the data service should also be within this range.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data in Table 5-1.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

5.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line
encoding type and line transmission mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

204 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


SHDSL Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode

5.1.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→SHDSL Port Binding


Line Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object
window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

Version: C/1 205


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Select ShdslATM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-10.

Figure 5-10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode (Completed)

206 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.11 Configuring the PVC Profile

Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.

The HD32A card provides 32 G.SHDSL user ports; and one G.SHDSL port
corresponds to eight PVCs. A PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber
services, and a G.SHDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber
services.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→PVC


Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode

Version: C/1 207


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.1.12 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile

Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Binding PVC Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values
for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-13.

208 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-13 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-14.

Figure 5-14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

Version: C/1 209


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.1.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile

Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→Port


Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate
limiting profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode

5.1.14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile

Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

210 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Binding Rate Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default
values for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-16.

Figure 5-16 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-17.

Version: C/1 211


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-17 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

5.1.15 Configuring Parameters of the SHDSL Port Bound


Group

Configure the SHDSL port bound group to enhance the line rate.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→SHDSL M-Pair to open


the SHDSL M-Pair tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.SHDSL Service
in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

212 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.1.16 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the HD32A card based on
unicast service flow.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Port VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click HD32A in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane.
Then select the 32 ports with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the "Selected" pane, as
shown in Figure 5-20.

Version: C/1 213


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-20 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select the Service Type check
box and select Unicast from the Initial Value drop-down list. Retain the default
values for other parameters.

9. Select the CVLAN Mode row, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down list.
Use the default values for other parameters.

10. Select the CVLAN Settings row. In the Configuration Item group box, select
the VLAN ID row, and enter 800 in the Initial Value field. Enter 1 in the Step
text box. Use the default values for other parameters.

214 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the "Step"
to the difference between two successive values. The item "Repeat"
refers to the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

11. Select the line Priority or CoS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

12. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode

13. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

Version: C/1 215


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

14. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-22.

Figure 5-22 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode

5.1.17 Configuration Result

PC1 to PC31 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.

5.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service


Based on TDM (Local Mode)

The following introduces how to configure the G.SHDSL service in the transparent
transmission mode (local mode based on TDM).

5.2.1 Configuration Rules

G.SHDSL supports multiple service types, such as ATM, TDM, etc.

216 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

TDM means the time division multiplexing mode. TDM refers to transmitting multiple
digital data, voice, and video signals at one medium at the same time via different
channels or timeslots. It needs clock synchronization, mainly used in PSTN.

5.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The PBX and E1/V.355 data private line services are accessed to the HDT8A card
of the AN5006-20 via the Modem, and the data are uplinked to the PSTN via the
HDT8A card. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.

Network Diagram

Figure 5-23 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can use the HDT8A / HDT8B card to implement the G.SHDSL
service in the TDM transparent mode. This example only uses the HDT8A card.

5.2.3 Planning Data

The HDT8A card in Slot 1 of the AN5006-20 acts as the service interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required. The
planning data are shown in Table 5-2.

Version: C/1 217


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the HDT8B Optional. Users need


Slot No. 1
card that is actually used. to configure this item
Configuring the
when the HDT8B
working mode of Set the working mode of the
card serves as the
the card (optional) Working Mode HDT8B card. The options include Local
service interface
local mode and remote mode.
card.
Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card in actual use. 1
Port No. The E1 port number of the HDT8A card actually used. E1-1
Configuring E1
Configure this item according to the network planning of
data
Impedance the operator. Select the E1 interface impedance that is 75Ω
actually used. The options include 75Ω and 120Ω.

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
Configuring clock E1 1-
Main Clock Sets the clock acquirement mode.
LoopTimed

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card actually
Enabling the Port No. 1 to 8
used.
SHDSL port
Enables or disables the SHDSL port. The default setting is
Enable Enable
Disable.
Configure this item according to the network planning of
Profile Name ShdslTDM
the operator.

Configure this item according to the network planning of


Port Mode TDM
the operator. The options include ATM and TDM.

Configure this item according to the network planning of


Code Type the operator. The options include PAM16, PAM32, and PAM32
Auto.
Transmission Configure this item according to the network planning of
Configuring an Annex B
standard the operator. The options include Annex A and Annex B.
SHDSL line profile
Target SNR Margin The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
6
Down (dB) value is 6 dB.
Insure SNR Margin The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the
3
Down (DB) default value is 3dB.
Target SNRM Up The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
6
(DB) value is 6 dB.
Target SNR Margin The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the
3
Up (DB) default value is 3dB.

218 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enables or disables the line detection function. The default


Line Probe Enable Disable
setting is disable.

Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
Binding SHDSL
The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card actually
ports to the Port No. 1 to 8
used.
SHDSL line profile
Profile Id Select the configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslTDM

5.2.4 Configuration Flow

The flow of configuring the G.SHDSL service in the TDM transparent transmission
mode is shown in Figure 5-24.

Figure 5-24 Flow Chart for Configuring the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode

Version: C/1 219


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.2.5 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card

Note:

This configuration step is optional. If the HDT8B card acts as the service
interface card, the uplink card of the AN5006-20 is not in use and the
relevant parameter configuration of the uplink card is not necessary. The
working mode of the HDT8B card should be set to Local Mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational tree pane, select Common Config→Card Working Mode


to bring up the Card Working Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 5-25.

Figure 5-25 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card

5.2.6 Configuring E1 Data

Configure the impedance value of the E1 link.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

220 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→V5 Voice Service


Config→E1 Configuration. In the Select Object window that appears, select
the HDT8A card to be configured, and click OK to bring up the E1
Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-26.

Figure 5-26 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode

5.2.7 Configuring Clock

Configure the mode of acquiring the E1 link clock.

Precautions

u The equipment supports clock acquired from multiple ways, including the local
oscillator clock and the clock extracted from E1 links 1 to 8.

u If the clock of the designated E1 link is unavailable, the equipment will search
for the available E1 link automatically according to the sequence of the E1 links.
For example, users want to extract clock from the first E1 link, but this E1 link is
unavailable. In this case, the equipment will try to extract the clock in sequence
starting from the second E1 link until the clock is extracted successfully.

Version: C/1 221


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Service→V5 Voice Service


Config→Clock Configuration. In the Select Object window that appears,
select the HDT8A card to be configured, and click OK to bring up the Clock
Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-27.

Figure 5-27 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission
Mode

5.2.8 Enabling the SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the HDT8A card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

222 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, enter 0 in the Step field, and click
OK, as shown in Figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)

Version: C/1 223


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.2.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line
encoding type and line transmission mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


SHDSL Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-30.

Figure 5-30 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode

5.2.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

224 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→SHDSL Port Binding


Line Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object
window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select ShdslTDM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-31.

Figure 5-31 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-32.

Version: C/1 225


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-32 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)

5.2.11 Configuration Result

The POTS service and data service can access the PSTN successfully.

5.3 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service


- SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service Based on
TDM

The following introduces how to configure the SHDSL circuit emulation service
based on TDM.

5.3.1 Configuration Rules

TDM means the time division multiplex mode. TDM refers to transmitting multiple
digital data, voice, and video signals through the same communication medium at
the same time via different channels or timeslots. It should be supported by clock
synchronization, mainly used in PSTN.

226 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.3.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The PBX and E1/V.35 data private line services are accessed to the HDT8B card of
the AN5006-20 via the Modem, uplinked to the OLT and used together with the TDM
service card of the OLT, so as to implement G.SHDSL circuit emulation function
based on TDM and provide eight channels of SHDSL interface services for
subscribers.

Network Diagram

Figure 5-33 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service - SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service
Based on TDM

Hardware Configuration

The HDT8B card of the AN5006-20 can be used together with the TDM service card
of the OLT, so as to implement SHDSL circuit emulation service based on TDM and
provide eight channels of SHDSL interface services for subscribers.

5.3.3 Planning Data

The HDT8B card in Slot 1 of the AN5006-20 acts as the service interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required.

Version: C/1 227


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-3 Planning Data of the SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service Based on TDM on the OLT
Side

Item Description Example

The slot number of the GC8B card that is


Slot No. 1
connected to the ONU.
Configuring system
The clock mode of the AN5006-20, including
clock
Clock source Local Oscillator and System Clock. Local Local Oscillator
Oscillator is used by default.

The slot number of the CE1B card in actual


Slot No. 2
use.
The clock recovery mode between the ONU
Configuring clock
and the OLT. The options include adaptive
recovery
mode clock, loopback time1, Differential Clock, and adaptive clock
enhance_adaptive clock. The default setting
is adaptive clock.

Read-only. The slot number of the GC8B


Slot No. 1
card that is connected to the ONU.
Read-only. The number of the PON port that
PON No. 8
is connected to the ONU.
ONU No. Read-only. The serial number of the ONU. 1
The slot number of the HDTB8 card of the
ONU SLOT 1
AN5006-20 in actual use.
The E1 port number of the HDTB8 card of
ONU Port No. 1
the AN5006-20 in actual use.
The slot number of the CE1B card in actual
Configuring E1 TDM-1 Card Slot No. 2
use.
service
The E1 sequence number of the CE1B card
Local End E1 No. 8
that is actually used.

Maximum capacity for storing the E1 frame


received by the TDM card Up to 32 ×125 us
Remote Jitter Buffer 32
E1 frames can be stored by default. 32 is the
recommended value.
Maximum capacity for storing the E1 frames
received by the ONU. Up to 32 ×125 us E1
Office End Cache 32
frames can be stored by default. 32 is the
recommended value.

228 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-4 Planning Data of the SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service Based on TDM on the
AN5006-20 Side

Item Description Example

Service ID Read-only item. 1


For this item, users can type digital numbers,
Service Name letters, and underlines, and its maximum data1
length is 30 characters.

The starting VLAN ID of the service. The


Starting VLAN ID 4090
value ranges from 1 to 4095.

The ending VLAN ID of the service. The value


Ending VLAN ID 4090
ranges from 1 to 4095.

The port number of the service or the Trunk


group number.
Port No. / Trunk If the uplink port has joined the Trunk group,
PON
Configuring the uplink Group ID the system only displays the Trunk group
service VLAN number, but does not display the number of
the uplink port.

The uplink service VLAN tag processing


mode. Two options are available: tag and
untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the uplink
packets will be stripped automatically
Port Tag / Untag when they pass the uplink port and the tag
packets will be transmitted in the untag
form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the uplink
data packets will not be stripped when
they pass the uplink port.

The slot number of the HDT8B card that is


Slot No. 1
Configuring the actually used.
working mode The working mode of the HDT8B card. The
Working Mode Remote
options include local mode and remote mode.

The slot number of the HDT8B card that is


Slot No. 1
actually used.

The E1 port number of the HDT8B card in


Port No. E1-1
actual use.
Configuring E1 data
Configure this item according to the network
planning of the operator. Select the E1
Impedance 75Ω
interface impedance that is actually used.
Includes 75Ω and 120Ω.

Version: C/1 229


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-4 Planning Data of the SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service Based on TDM on the
AN5006-20 Side (Continued)

Item Description Example

The slot number of the HDT8B card that is


Slot No. 1
actually used.
Enabling the SHDSL The SHDSL port number of the HDT8B card
Port No. 1 to 8
port in actual use.
Enables or disables the SHDSL port. The
Enable Enable
default setting is Disable.

Configure this item according to the network


Profile Name ShdslTDM
planning of the operator.

Configure this item according to the network


Port Mode planning of the operator. The options include TDM
ATM and TDM.
Configure this item according to the network
Code Type planning of the operator. The options include PAM32
PAM16, PAM32, and Auto.
Configure this item according to the network
Transmission
planning of the operator. The options include Annex B
Configuring an standard
Annex A and Annex B.
SHDSL line profile
Target SNR Margin The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
6
Down (dB) and the default value is 6dB.
Insure SNR Margin The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is
3
Down (DB) dB; and the default value is 3dB.
Target SNRM Up The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
6
(DB) and the default value is 6 dB.
Target SNR Margin The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is
3
Up (DB) dB; and the default value is 3dB.
Enables or disables the line detection
Line Probe Enable Disable
function. The default setting is disable.

The slot number of the HDT8B card that is


Slot No. 1
Binding an SHDSL actually used.
port to the SHDS line The SHDSL port number of the HDT8B card
Port No. 1 to 8
profile in actual use.
Profile ID The configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslTDM

230 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.3.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the SHDSL circuit emulation service based on TDM is
shown in Figure 5-34.

Figure 5-34 Configuration Flow of the G.SHDSL Service - SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service
Based on TDM

5.3.5 Configuring the SHDSL Circuit Emulation Service on


the OLT Based on TDM

The following introduces how to configure the SHDSL circuit emulation service on
the OLT based on TDM for the equipment.

5.3.5.1 Configuring System Clock

Configure the way for the OLT to obtain the clock to provide the downlink TDM
service clock.

Version: C/1 231


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to bring up the Local Service Config-PON service tab from the
menu bar.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Reference Clock to


open the Reference Clock tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-35.

Figure 5-35 Configuring the Clock Reference Source for the Card

5.3.5.2 Configuring Clock Recovery

When the GEM packets sent from the ONU side get to the OLT, the OLT will resolve
the Ethernet packets from the GEM packets and adapt them to the TDM packets;
meanwhile the OLT will recover the TDM service clock and send it to the uplink
equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Time Config→Clock


Recovery Mode to open the Clock Recovery Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-36.

232 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-36 Time Recovery Configuration

5.3.5.3 Configuring E1 Service

Bind the E1 port of the ONU with the corresponding E1 sequence number of the
TDM card, and configure the buffer of the remote and local ends.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Click the ONU List button to open the ONU List pane.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Service Configuration from the menu.

4. In the Operational tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→E1


Service Config to open the E1 Service Config tab.

5. In the pane at the right side, click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the
Rows for Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the Create on Device button to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 5-37.

Figure 5-37 Configuring E1 Service

5.3.6 Configuring the Circuit Emulation Service Based on


TDM in the AN5006-20

The following introduces how to configure the circuit emulation service based on
TDM for the equipment.

Version: C/1 233


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.3.6.1 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN and divide the services by different VLAN IDs.

When the HDT8B card is working in the remote mode, a uplink service VLAN with
VLAN ID 4090 should be configured so that it can be uplinked to the OL.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-38.

Figure 5-38 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN - TDM Circuit Emulation Service Based on
SHDSL

5.3.6.2 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card

Set the remote mode for the HDT8B card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

234 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

3. In the Operational tree pane, select Common Config→Card Working Mode


to bring up the Card Working Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button to complete the configuration, as shown in


Figure 5-39.

Figure 5-39 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card

5.3.6.3 Configuring E1 Data

Configure the impedance value of the E1 link.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select POTS Config→V5 Voice Service Config→E1 Configuration in the


Operational Tree pane to bring up the E1 Configuration tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-40.

Version: C/1 235


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-40 Configuring E1 Data

5.3.6.4 Enabling the SHDSL Port

Enable the SHDSL port. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when
disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the HDT8A card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial Value drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 5-41.

236 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Figure 5-41 Enabling an SHDSL Port

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-42.

Figure 5-42 Enabling an SHDSL Port - Completed

Version: C/1 237


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.3.6.5 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line
encoding type and line transmission mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Profile Config→


SHDSL Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add. dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line
profile.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-43.

Figure 5-43 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile

5.3.6.6 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile

Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

238 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→SHDSL Port Binding


Line Profile. Select the HDT8B card to be configured in the Select Object
window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line
Profile tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.

5. Select ShdslTDM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-44.

Figure 5-44 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-45.

Version: C/1 239


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 5-45 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile - Completed

5.3.7 Configuration Result

The POTS service and data service can access the PSTN successfully.

5.4 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service - Circuit


Emulation Service Based on E1

The following introduces how to configure the circuit emulation service of the
AN5006-20 based on E1.

5.4.1 Configuration Rules

The HDT8B card of the AN5006-20 equipment can be used together with the TDM
service card of the OLT, so as to implement circuit emulation service based on E1
and provide eight channels of E1 interface services for subscribers.

u The equipment supports clock acquired from multiple ways, including the local
oscillator clock and the clock extracted from E1 links 1 to 8.

240 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.4.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The PBX and E1 data private line services are accessed to the HDT8B card of the
AN5006-20, uplinked to the OLT and used together with the TDM service card of the
OLT, so as to implement circuit emulation function based on E1 and provide eight
channels of E1 interface services for subscribers.

Network Diagram

Figure 5-46 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service - Circuit Emulation Service Based on
E1

Hardware Configuration

The HDT8B card of the equipment can be used together with the TDM service card
of the OLT, so as to implement circuit emulation service based on E1 and provide
eight channels of E1 interface services for subscribers.

5.4.3 Planning Data

The HDT8B card in Slot 1 of the AN5006-20 acts as the service interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required.

Version: C/1 241


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 5-5 Planning Data of the Circuit Emulation Service Based on E1 on the OLT Side

Item Description Example

Read-only. The slot number of the GC8B card


Slot No. 1
that is connected to the ONU.
Read-only. The number of the PON port that is
PON No. 8
connected to the ONU.
ONU No. Read-only. The serial number of the ONU. 1
The slot number of the HDTB8 card of the
ONU SLOT 1
AN5006-20 in actual use.
The E1 port number of the HDTB8 card of the
ONU Port No. 1
AN5006-20 in actual use.
TDM-1 Card Slot The slot number of the CE1B card in actual
Configuring E1 2
No. use.
service
The E1 sequence number of the CE1B card
Local End E1 No. 8
that is actually used.

Maximum capacity for storing the E1 frame


received by the TDM card Up to 32 ×125 us
Remote Jitter Buffer 32
E1 frames can be stored by default. 32 is the
recommended value.
Maximum capacity for storing the E1 frames
received by the ONU. Up to 32 ×125 us E1
Office End Cache 32
frames can be stored by default. 32 is the
recommended value.

Table 5-6 Planning Data of the Circuit Emulation Service Based on E1 on the AN5006-20 Side

Item Description Example

Service ID Read-only item. 1


For this item, users can type digital numbers,
Service Name letters, and underlines, and its maximum data2
length is 30 characters.

The starting VLAN ID of the service. The


Starting VLAN ID 4090
value ranges from 1 to 4095.
Configuring the uplink The ending VLAN ID of the service. The value
Ending VLAN ID 4090
service VLAN ranges from 1 to 4095.

The port number of the service or the Trunk


group number.
Port No. / Trunk If the uplink port has joined the Trunk group,
PON
Group ID the system only displays the Trunk group
number, but does not display the number of
the uplink port.

242 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

Table 5-6 Planning Data of the Circuit Emulation Service Based on E1 on the AN5006-20 Side
(Continued)

Item Description Example

The uplink service VLAN tag processing


mode. Two options are available: tag and
untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the uplink
packets will be stripped automatically
Port Tag/Untag when they pass the uplink port and the tag
packets will be transmitted in the untag
form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the uplink
data packets will not be stripped when
they pass the uplink port.

The slot number of the HDT8B card that is


Configuring the Slot No. 1
actually used.
working mode of the
The working mode of the HDT8B card. The
card Working Mode Remote
options include local mode and remote mode.

5.4.4 Configuration Flow

Figure 5-47 shows the configuration flow of the circuit emulation service based on
E1.

Figure 5-47 Configuration Flow of the G.SHDSL Service - Circuit Emulation Service Based on
E1

Version: C/1 243


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5.4.5 Configuring the Circuit Emulation Service Based on


E1 in the OLT

The following introduces how to configure the circuit emulation service based on E1
in the OLT.

5.4.5.1 Configuring E1 Service

Bind the E1 port of the ONU with the corresponding E1 sequence number of the
TDM card, and configure the buffer of the remote and local ends.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Click the ONU List button to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Business configuration from the menu.

4. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Service Config to open the Port Service Config tab.

5. In the right pane, click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for
Add: dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click Create on Device to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-48.

Figure 5-48 Configuring E1 Service

5.4.6 Configuring the Circuit Emulation Service on the


AN5006-20 Based on E1

The following introduces how to configure the circuit emulation service on the
equipment based on E1.

244 Version: C/1


5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service

5.4.6.1 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN and divide the services by different VLAN IDs.

When the HDT8B card is working in the remote mode, a uplink service VLAN with
VLAN ID 4090 should be configured so that it can be uplinked to the OL.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-49.

Figure 5-49 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN - Circuit Emulation Service Based on E1

5.4.6.2 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card

Configure the HDT8B card in the remote node.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: C/1 245


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, selectCommon Config→Card Working Mode


to bring up the Card Working Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-50.

Figure 5-50 Configuring the Working Mode of the Card

5.4.7 Configuration Result

The POTS service and data service can access the PSTN successfully.

246 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

The following introduces how to start up the multicast services for the equipment.

Common Configuration

Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the Proxy
Mode

Example of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the


Controllable Mode

Version: C/1 247


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

6.1 Common Configuration

The following introduces the procedures of common configurations on the


equipment to start up multicast services.

6.1.1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End

Configure the uplink interface VLAN of the AN5116-06B for the designated service
flow, as as to identify the services according to their VLAN IDs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Local VLAN→Local


End Service Outer VLAN to open the Local End Service Outer VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Configuring the Outer VLAN Data at the Local End

6.1.2 Adding a Port to the VLAN

After creating the local end service VLAN, you can configure the corresponding
uplink port for the VLAN.

248 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE AN5116-06B in Main Topology to bring up the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration→PON service from the


menu bar to bring up the Local Service Config-PON service tab from the
menu bar.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select VLAN Service→Add Slot Port to VLAN
to open the Add Slot Port to VLAN tab.

4. Select the left pane, click Add, enter 1 in the displayed dialog box and then
click OK to add a VLAN configuration entry.

5. Select the right pane, click Add, enter 1 in the dialog box that appears and then
click OK to add a port configuration entry.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click Create on Device to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Adding a Port into the VLAN

6.1.3 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode

Configure the working mode of the AN5116-06B to implement the multicast service.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→IGMP Param.


Config→IGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

Version: C/1 249


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode

6.1.4 Configuring OLT Multicast Default VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information of the OLT and designate a VLAN path for
the multicast service.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→Multicast VLAN→


Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN

6.2 Example for Multicast Service Configuration


of the ADSL Card in the Proxy Mode

The following introduces the multicast service configuration methods in the proxy
mode.

250 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.2.1 Configuration Rules

u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including


joining, leaving and querying.

u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol


message.

u Each AD64 card can provide up to 64 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber
can view up to 256 multicast programs and each AD64 card can support as
many as 1023 multicast programs.

6.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

One AN5006-20 is connected with 64 IPTV subscribers, and the home gateway
adds and strips the VLAN tags. The VLANs are transparent to the AN5006-20.

Network Diagram

The network of the ADSL multicast service in the proxy mode is shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5 Network Diagram of the ADSL Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode

u In the uplink direction, the subscriber's data are added with the VLAN ID 200
via a home gateway uplinked with ADSL. The data are transmitted to the
AN5006-20, and then the AN5006-20 transmits the VLAN tag transparently and
uplinks to the IPTV server.

Version: C/1 251


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

u In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20 transmits the downlink data


messages transparently to the home gateway using the multicast protocol, and
then the home gateway strips the VLAN tag and forwards the data to the video
subscribers.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment can use the AD32, AD64, VD32 or CASA card to start up the
multicast service in the proxy mode. In the following paragraphs the AD64 card is
used as an example.

6.2.3 Planning Data

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32 card, AD64 card or the VD32 card as the
subscriber side interface card. The following uses the AD64 card as an example.
The management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are compulsory.
The planning data are shown in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode

Item Description Example

The number of the slot for the management control card.


Disabling the Slot No. 5
Set it to 5.
uplink port
Port No. The number of the uplink port actually used. 1
multicast packet
Packet Type Select multicast for the multicast service. Multicast
suppression
Enable/Disable Disables the multicast packet suppression. Disable

Service ID It is assigned by the system automatically. 1


Configure this item according to the operator’s network
Service Name iptv1
planning.
Configuring the
Configure the starting VLAN ID of the uplink port service
uplink service Starting VLAN ID 200
according to the network planning of the operator.
VLAN
Configure the ending VLAN ID of the uplink port service
Ending VLAN ID 200
according to the network planning of the operator.

Port No. The number of the uplink port actually used. PON

252 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Set the VLAN tag property of the uplink service to untag


or tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the uplink packets
will be stripped automatically when they pass the
port and the packets will be uplinked in the untag
Port Tag/Untag form, while the downlink untag packets will be tag
added with designated tags when they pass the
port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the uplink / downlink
data packets will not be processed when they pass
the port.

Configuring the Select the multicast mode for the equipment according to
IGMP Mode Proxy Mode
multicast mode the network planning of the operator.

Configuring IGMP Configure the multicast proxy IP address according to


IGMP Proxy IP 10.25.10.1
proxy IP the network planning of the operator.

Configuring Configure the multicast default VLAN ID according to the


multicast default Multicast VLAN network planning of the operator. The value should be 200
VLAN within the uplink service VLAN range.

Slot No. The number of the slot actually used by the AD64 card. 2

Port No. The number of the port actually used by the AD64 card. 1 to 64
Service Type The actual service type Multicast
Configure the VLAN tag processing mode for the ADSL
Configuring the port according to the network planning of the operator.
port service u Tag: Adds a VLAN tag to the received data.
CVLAN Mode Transparent
VLAN u Translation: Translates the original VLAN ID to one
compliant with the operator's rules.
u Transparent: Forwards the received data directly.

Configure the received VLAN ID according to the


CVLAN ID 200
network planning of the operator.

Slot No. The number of the slot actually used by the AD64 card. 2
Enabling the
Port No. The number of the port actually used by the AD64 card. 1 to 64
ADSL port
Enable Enable the ADSL port. Enable

Version: C/1 253


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

6.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the ADSL multicast service in the proxy mode is shown in
Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 Flow of Configuring the Multicast Service on the ADSL Card in the Proxy Mode

6.2.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

For the methods of configuring uplink service parameters, see Common


Configuration.

254 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.2.6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet


Suppression

Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the equipment's uplink port, so
as to avoid rate restriction on the multicast messages.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Broadcast Strom


Suppression to bring up the Broadcast Strom Suppression tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression

6.2.7 Enabling the ADSL Port

Enable the ports of the AD64 card. Users can not configure the parameters for the
ports when they are disabled.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

Version: C/1 255


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.

4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.

5. Select Enable from the Initial Value drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner

6. Return to the Port Enable window, and you will find that the item Enable for all
the ports has been modified to Enable.

7. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-9.

256 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-9 Configuration for Enabling the ADSL Port Completed

6.2.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the uplink service VLAN of the management control card, so as to divide
the services using different VLAN IDs.

The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges from 1 to 4085. The VLAN ID added into
the uplink multicast protocol message by the service management card must be
within the configured VLAN range of the uplink service.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-10.

Version: C/1 257


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-10 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN in the Proxy Mode

6.2.9 Configuring the Multicast Mode

Configure the equipment's working mode to implement the multicast service.

Precautions

u When the multicast mode is set to "proxy", the AD64 card will work in the
snooping mode, whereas the service management card, as the proxy of the
user interface card, will manage the members of the multicast group actively, so
as to reduce protocol overhead of the uplink device.

u When the multicast mode is set to "snooping", both the AD64 card and the
service management card work in the snooping mode. As the configuration
procedures in this mode are similar to those of the proxy mode, only different in
the multicast mode setting; configuration examples for the snooping mode are
omitted here.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→IGMP Param.


Config→IGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-11.

258 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-11 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode

6.2.10 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address

Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address will be
used as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the
equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→IGMP Proxy IP to


open the IGMP Proxy IP tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown


in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Proxy Mode

6.2.11 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the
multicast service.

Version: C/1 259


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→Multicast VLAN→


Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN

6.2.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the AD64 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Port VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 6-14.

260 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-14 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 in the Proxy Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
"Selected" pane, as shown in Figure 6-15.

Version: C/1 261


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-15 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, and enter 200 in
the Initial Value field. User the default values for other parameters.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the "Step"
to the difference between two successive values. The item "Repeat"
refers to the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or CoS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

262 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 6-16.

Figure 6-16 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Proxy Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-17.

Version: C/1 263


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-17 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Proxy Mode

6.2.13 Configuration Result

After completing the configuration of multicast services in the proxy mode, check the
equipment status as follows.

6.2.13.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get Information→IGMP Param. Information→MC Group Statistics in


the Operational Tree pane.

264 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the current online
multicast group information. See Figure 6-18.

Figure 6-18 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

6.2.13.2 Viewing Online Group Information of Appointed Port

View the online multicast group information at Port 1 of the AD64 card in Slot 1
under the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get Information→IGMP Param. Information→Online IGMP Group


Information For Specific Port in the Operational Tree pane.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 2. Then double-click
the Port No. field, and enter 1.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group
information for the specified port. See Figure 6-19.

Figure 6-19 Viewing Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Proxy Mode

Version: C/1 265


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

6.2.13.3 Viewing the Core Switch Card's Multicast Address Table

View the multicast address table of the management control card in the current
multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→IGMP Param.


Information→MCU MC Address Table.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the multicast address table of
the core switch card. See Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20 Checking the Core Switch Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode

6.2.13.4 Viewing the Multicast Address Table of the Line Card

View the multicast address table of the AD64 card in Slot 2 in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

266 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→IGMP Param.


Information→Line Card MC Address Table.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 2.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address
table. See Figure 6-21.

Figure 6-21 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode

6.3 Example of Configuring the Multicast Service


on the VDSL Card in the Controllable Mode

The following introduces how to configure the multicast service in the controllable
mode.

6.3.1 Configuration Rules

u Each VD32 card can provide up to 32 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber
can view up to 256 multicast programs and each VD32 card can support as
many as 1023 multicast programs.

u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including


joining, leaving and querying.

u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol


message.

Version: C/1 267


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

6.3.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

One AN5006-20 is connected with 2 IPTV subscribers, and the home gateway adds
and strips the VLAN tags. The VLANs are transparent to the AN5006-20.

Network Diagram

The network of the VDSL multicast service in the controlled mode is shown in
Figure 6-22.

Figure 6-22 Network Diagram of the VDSL Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode

In the uplink direction, the user's untagged data are added with VLAN IDs 100 and
200 via VDSL uplinked home gateway. The data are then sent to the AN5006-20.
The VLAN tags are transmitted transparently by the AN5006-20, and then are
uplinked to the IPTV server. In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20 transparently
transmits the VLAN tags of the downlink data packets. After being stripped the
VLAN tags by the home gateway, the IPTV data are finally forwarded to the video
users.

Hardware Configuration

The AN5006-20 can use the AD32, AD64, or VD32 card to provision the multicast
service in the controlled mode. In the following paragraphs the VD32 card is used as
an example.

268 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6.3.3 Planning Data

The AN5006-20 uses the AD32, AD64, or VD32 card as the client end interface
card, and the following takes the VD32 card as an example. The management
control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required. The planning data
are shown in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode

Item Description Example

The number of the slot for the


Slot No. management control card. Set it to 5

Disabling the 5.

uplink port The number of the uplink port


Port No. 1
multicast actually used.
packet Select multicast for the multicast
Packet Type Multicast
suppression service.
Disables the multicast packet
Enable/Disable Disable
suppression.

It is assigned by the system


Service ID 1
automatically.

Configure this item according to


Service Name iptv2
the operator’s network planning.

Configure the starting VLAN ID of


the uplink port service according to
Configuring Starting VLAN ID 100
the network planning of the
the uplink
operator.
service VLAN
Configure the ending VLAN ID of
the uplink port service according to
Ending VLAN ID 200
the network planning of the
operator.

The number of the uplink port


Port No. PON
actually used.

Version: C/1 269


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Set the VLAN tag property of the


uplink service to untag or tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags
of the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
they pass the port and the
packets will be uplinked in the
Port Tag/Untag untag form, while the downlink tag
untag packets will be added
with designated tags when
they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of
the uplink / downlink data
packets will not be processed
when they pass the port.

Configuring Select the multicast mode for the


the multicast IGMP Mode equipment according to the Controllable mode
mode network planning of the operator.

Configure the multicast proxy IP


Configuring
IGMP Proxy IP address according to the network 10.26.10.1
IGMP proxy IP
planning of the operator.

Configure the multicast default


Configuring VLAN ID according to the network
multicast Multicast VLAN planning of the operator. The value 100
default VLAN should be within the uplink service
VLAN range.

Automatically assigned by the


Profile ID 1
system.

Configure this item according to


Profile Name a
Configuring the operator’s network planning.
multicast Configure this item according to
Group Address 226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3
profile the operator’s network planning.

Configure this item according to


Authority the network planning of the Normal Normal Preview
operator.

Configuring
multicast The group address configured in
Group Address 226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3
group the multicast profile
parameters

270 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to


the network planning of the
Group SVLAN operator. The group SVLAN 100 200 100
should be in the range of the uplink
SVLAN.
Configure this item according to
Group CVLAN the network planning of the - - -
operator. Retain the default value.

Configure this item according to


Preview Count
the network planning of the - - 5
(Times)
operator.

Configure this item according to


Preview Time
the network planning of the - - 10
(Min)
operator.

Configure this item according to


Preview Interval
the network planning of the - - 20
(Min)
operator.

Configure this item according to


Preview Reset
the network planning of the - - 24
Time (H)
operator.

Configure this item according to


Preview Total
the network planning of the - - 50
Time (Min)
operator.

The number of the slot actually


Slot No. 3
used by the VD32 card.

The number of the port actually


Port No. 1 2
used by the VD32 card.

Configure this item according to


Control switch the network planning of the Controlled
Configuring operator. Select controlled mode.
multicast port The profile name configured in the
IGMP Profile a
parameters multicast profile

Configure this item according to


Max Online
the network planning of the 32
Groups (Group)
operator. Retain the default value.

Configure this item according to


Port Bandwidth
the network planning of the 0
(Kbit/b)
operator. Retain the default value.

Version: C/1 271


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

Configure this item according to


Leave Mode the network planning of the NON FAST LEAVE
operator.

The number of the slot actually


Slot No. 3
used by the VD32 card.

The number of the port actually


Port No. 1 2
used by the VD32 card.

Service Type The actual service type Multicast


Configure the VLAN tag
processing mode for the ADSL
port according to the network
planning of the operator.
Configuring
u Tag: Adds a VLAN tag to the
the port
received data.
service VLAN CVLAN Mode Transparent
u Translation: Translates the
original VLAN ID to one
compliant with the operator's
rules.
u Transparent: Forwards the
received data directly.

Configure the received VLAN ID


CVLAN Rule ID according to the network planning 100, 200
of the operator.

The number of the slot actually


Slot No. 3
used by the VD32 card.
Enabling the
The number of the port actually
VDSL port Port No. 1 2
used by the VD32 card.

Enable Enables the VDSL port. Enable

6.3.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the VDSL multicast service in the controlled mode is
shown in Figure 6-23.

272 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-23 Flow of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the Controllable
Mode

Version: C/1 273


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

6.3.5 Configuring Uplink Service Parameters

For the methods of configuring uplink service parameters, see Common


Configuration.

6.3.6 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet


Suppression

Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the uplink port.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Broadcast Strom


Suppression to bring up the Broadcast Strom Suppression tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-24.

Figure 6-24 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression

6.3.7 Enabling the VDSL Ports

Enable the ports of the VD32 card. Users can not configure the parameters for the
ports when they are disabled.

274 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Port Config→Port


Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-25.

Figure 6-25 Enabling the VDSL Ports (Completed)

6.3.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN

Configure the VLAN information of the uplink services on the management control
card, as as to identify the services by their VLAN IDs.

The VLAN ID of the uplink service ranges between 1 and 4085. The VLAN ID added
by the service management card into the uplink multicast protocol message must be
within the configured range of the uplink service VLAN.

Version: C/1 275


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.

4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-26.

Figure 6-26 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN in the Controlled Mode

6.3.9 Configuring the Multicast Mode

Configure the equipment's working mode to implement the multicast service.

Note:

Under the controllable mode, the VD32 card works in the controllable
mode, whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the user
interface card, manages subscribers' authorities to view or preview the
programs.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

276 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→IGMP Param.


Config→IGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-27.

Figure 6-27 Configuring the Controllable Multicast Mode

6.3.10 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address

Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address will be
used as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the
equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→IGMP Proxy IP to


open the IGMP Proxy IP tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-28.

Figure 6-28 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Controllable Mode

Version: C/1 277


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

6.3.11 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN

Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the
multicast service.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→Multicast VLAN→


Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-29.

Figure 6-29 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN in the Controllable Mode

6.3.12 Configuring the Multicast Profile

Configure the authority of watching programs for a specified multicast group.

Note:

The first row is the blank by default and can not be modified. When
configuring the IGMP Port Parameters, if the user port is not required to
be bound with the multicast profile, the empty profile should be selected.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

278 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→Multicast Profile &


Port→Multicast Profile.

4. In the left pane, click Add on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number
of rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new multicast
profile.

5. In the right pane, click Add on the toolbar, and enter 3 in the Enter the number
of rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to add three entries.

6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

7. Click the "Create on Device" button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-30.

Figure 6-30 Configuring the Multicast Profile

6.3.13 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters

Configure basic parameters of the multicast group, including group SVLAN, preview
count, preview duration, and preview interval, etc.

Note:

Retain the default preview values of the multicast groups 226.0.1.2 and
226.0.1.2. Only when the multicast groups are in the preview mode can
the preview parameters become valid.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: C/1 279


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→IGMP Param.


Config→IGMP Group Parameters to access the "IGMP Group Parameters"
tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-31.

Figure 6-31 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters

6.3.14 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters

Configure the multicast port parameters, including control switch, multicast group
profile, maximum number of online groups, port bandwidth, etc.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast Service→IGMP Param.


Config→IGMP Port Parameters to access the "IGMP Port Parameters" tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-32.

280 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-32 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters

6.3.15 Configuring the Port Service VLAN

Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the VD32 card of the
equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→Port VLAN Config to


open the Port VLAN Config tab.

4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 1 and 2 at the same time, as shown in Figure 6-33.

Version: C/1 281


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-33 Selecting Ports in the Controllable Mode

5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the "Selected" pane, as
shown in Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-34 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data

282 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add. dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.

7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.

8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.

9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 100 in the step field.

Note:

When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the "Step"
to the difference between two successive values. The item "Repeat"
refers to the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.

10. Select the line Priority or CoS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.

11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 6-35.

Version: C/1 283


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 6-35 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Controllable Mode

12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.

13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-36.

284 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 6-36 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Controllable Mode

6.3.16 Configuration Result

After completing the configuration of multicast services in the controllable mode,


check the equipment status as follows.

6.3.16.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information

View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get Information→IGMP Param. Information→MC Group Statistics in


the Operational Tree pane.

4. In the left pane, select the group addresses 226.0.1.1 and 226.0.1.2
respectively and click Read from Device on the toolbar to read the current

Version: C/1 285


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

online multicast group information. It shows that two subscribers are watching
the two multicast programs, as shown in Figure 6-37.

Figure 6-37 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal User

5. Select the group address 226.0.1.3 in the left pane and click Read from
Device on the toolbar to read the current online multicast group information. It
shows that two subscribers are watching the multicast program, as shown in
Figure 6-38.

Figure 6-38 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview User

6.3.16.2 Viewing Online Group Information of Appointed Port

View the online multicast group information at port 1 of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the
current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. Select Get Information→IGMP Param. Information→Online IGMP Group


Information For Specific Port in the Operational Tree pane.

286 Version: C/1


6 Configuring the Multicast Service

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 3. Then double-click
the Port No. field, and enter 1.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group
information at the specified port. See Figure 6-39.

Figure 6-39 Viewing the Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Controllable Mode

6.3.16.3 Viewing the Core Switch Card's Multicast Address Table

View the core switch card's multicast address table in the current multicast mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→IGMP Param.


Information→MCU MC Address Table.

4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the multicast address table of
the core switch card. See Figure 6-40.

Figure 6-40 Checking the MCU Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controlled Mode

Version: C/1 287


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

6.3.16.4 Viewing the Multicast Address Table of the Line Card

View the multicast address table of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the current multicast
mode.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→IGMP Param.


Information→Line Card MC Address Table.

4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 3.

5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address
table. See Figure 6-41.

Figure 6-41 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controllable Mode

288 Version: C/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

The following introduces how to upgrade the software of cards for the equipment.

Precautions

Upgrading the Management Control Card

Upgrading the Line Card

Version: C/1 289


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

7.1 Precautions

Card rebooting is required during upgrade, which may affect the service concerned.
The operators should follow the instructions given below to minimize the impact on
the service.

u It is advised to carry out the upgrade at night when service traffic is at a


relatively low volume.

u Ensure the proper connection between the management VLAN port of the
AN5006-20 and the FTP server. The IP address of the management VLAN and
that of the FTP server are in the same subnet, and users can use the "Ping"
command on the FTP server to test its connectivity with the equipment before
upgrade operations.

u Save the current software version before the upgrade for fear the upgrade may
fail or the new version may encounter a major problem.

u The file type used for the upgrade should match the card type; otherwise the
upgrade may fail.

u Upgrade the service interface card first and then the management control card,
if both types need upgrade.

7.2 Upgrading the Management Control Card

The following introduces how to upgrade the management control card for the
equipment.

7.2.1 Upgrade Rules

The management control card must be rebooted after upgrade. Therefore, it is


necessary to save the current configuration to the management control card's Flash
and back up the current configuration and the system software to the FTP server.

290 Version: C/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

7.2.2 Planning Data

The following introduces upgrading the software of the MCU-GPON card as an


example.

The planning data of upgrading the management control card software are shown in
Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Planning Data of Upgrading the Management Control Card

Item Description Example

Configure the parameters


Related parameters of the card to be according to the number of the slot
Core switch card in Slot 05
upgraded of the core switch card in actual
use.
The IP address of the FTP server
FTP server IP 10.92.20.168
that is actually used

The user name of the FTP server


FTP server username 1
that is actually used

The password of the FTP server


FTP server password 1
that is actually used

Configure the file name in actual


Task Name system
use.
Select the cycle to execute this
Backing up the
Execution Type task. Users can select one time or a One time
current
cycle.
configuration file
Select the name of the used FTP
ftp
Extend information server.
Number of retries 2
Configure the file name in actual
Task Name config
use.
Select the cycle to execute this
Backing up the
Execution Type task. Users can select one time or a One time
system software
cycle.

Select the name of the used FTP


Extend information ftp
server.
Upgrading the Configure the file name in actual
Task Name upgrade
management use.
control card Select the card to be upgraded.
Object source MCU-GPON[5]
software Select the core switch card.

Version: C/1 291


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 7-1 Planning Data of Upgrading the Management Control Card (Continued)

Item Description Example

Select the cycle to execute this


Execution Type task. Users can select one time or a One time
cycle.

Select the name of the used FTP


ftp
server.
Extend Information
Select or enter the name of the
MCU.bin
upgrade file.

7.2.3 Upgrade Flow

The flow of upgrading the management control card is shown in Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card

292 Version: C/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

7.2.4 Saving Current Configuration to Flash

Users can save the configuration data into the FLASH to restore the equipment
configuration in case the upgrade fails or the new version has encountered a
problem.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System Control→Save Config to Flash


to bring up the Issue the command dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Saving the Configuration into the Flash

4. Click OK, and the system begins to execute the command.

5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.

Version: C/1 293


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

7.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File

Back up all the current configuration files. In case that the upgrade fails, you can
use the backup configuration file to restore the equipment to the state before
upgrade.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select System→


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Configuration Backup→Configuration Export Task,


and click Create to open the Create Configuration Export Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute Now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration Data

7.2.6 Backing up the System Software

Back up the current system software. The system can restore to the software status
before upgrading in case the upgrade fails or a fault occurs in the upgrade version.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select System→


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Configuration Backup→Software Backup Task, and


click Create to open the Create Software Backup Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute Now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software

294 Version: C/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

7.2.7 Upgrading the Management Control Card Software

The following introduces how to upgrade the management control card software.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select System→


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task and
click Create to open the Create System Software Update Task dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-5.

Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Management Control Card

7.2.8 Resetting the Management Control Card

Reboot the management control card to validate the upgrade configurations.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System Control→Reset to bring up the


Reset dialog box.

4. Select reset core card from the drop-down list of Slot No. field.

5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to reset the management control card,
as shown in Figure 7-6.

Version: C/1 295


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 7-6 Resetting the Management Control Card

7.2.9 Checking the Software Version of the Management


Control Card

Check whether the software version of the management control card is correct after
upgrade.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Card Version to open


the Card Version tab.

4. Check whether the software version of the management control card in Slot 5 is
correct, as shown in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control Card

7.3 Upgrading the Line Card

The following introduces how to upgrade the line cards for the equipment.

296 Version: C/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

7.3.1 Upgrade Rules

Upgrade the software of line cards, including the POTS card, the ADSL interface
card, and the VDSL interface card.

u The cards of the same type can be upgraded in a batch manner.

u The procedures of upgrading the POTS card, the ADSL interface card and the
VDSL interface card are the same.

u The downloaded file types are different for the POTS card, the ADSL interface
card and the VDSL interface card. See Table 7-2 for the association between
the upgrade object and the downloaded file type.

Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type

Upgrade Object Downloaded File Type

POTS POTS64 Software


POTS32 POTS32 Software
VD32 AD32 Software
AD64 AD64 Software
VD32 VD32 Software
CASA CASA
HDT8A HDT8A
HDT8B HDT8B
HD32A HD32A

7.3.2 Planning Data

The following illustrates how to upgrade the software of the AD64 cards in slots 2
and 4 as an example. See Table 7-3 for the planning data.

Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

Item Description Example

Configure according to the


Related parameters of the card to be The ADSL64 cards in slots 2 and
number of the actually used slot
upgraded 4.
for the service interface card.
Upgrading the
The file name that is actually
ADSL Interface Basic Information AD64
used.
Card

Version: C/1 297


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software (Continued)

Item Description Example

Set the cycle to execute this task.


Users can select one time or a One time
cycle.

Object source Select the card to be upgraded. AD64 card


Select the name of the used FTP
ftp
Extend Information server.
File name. AD64.bin

7.3.3 Upgrade Flow

The flow of upgrading the ADSL interface card software is shown in Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

7.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select System→


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

298 Version: C/1


7 Card Software Upgrade

2. In the left pane, select Upgrade Task→Batch Upgrade Task of the Service
Card, and click Create to bring up the Batch Upgrade Task of the Service
Card dialog box.

3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

4. Click Execute now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch Manner

7.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System Control→Reset to bring up the


Reset tab.

4. Click the Slot No field, select the slot where the upgraded ADSL interface card
is located from the drop-down list, and click Create on Device on the toolbar to
complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card

7.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface


Card

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

Version: C/1 299


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Card Version to open


the Card Version tab, as shown in Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card

300 Version: C/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

The following introduces differences between the manual link aggregation mode
and the static LACP aggregation mode and how to configure the two link
aggregations.

Example of Configuring the Manual Aggregation Mode

Configuration Example of Static LACP Aggregation Mode

Version: C/1 301


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

8.1 Example of Configuring the Manual


Aggregation Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of the manual aggregation mode.

8.1.1 Configuration Rules

u Two aggregation modes are applicable to the AN5006-20: manual and static
LACP. Users need to configure only either of the two.

u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups.

u An aggregation group may include 2 to 4 member ports.

8.1.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The GE1 and GE2 ports of the MCU card on the AN5006-20 form a manual
aggregation port group.

Network Diagram

Taking the MCU card as an example, see Figure 8-1 for the manual aggregation
network diagram.

302 Version: C/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

The GE1 and GE2 uplink ports of the MCU card are connected to the upper layer switch and the
ports are added manually to the aggregation group via the network management system, so as to
achieve load sharing of the aggregation group. When one of the physical link fails, traffic can be
automatically switched to other links in the aggregation group.

Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the MCU card to enable manual port aggregation.

8.1.3 Planning Data

The planning data of configuring the manual aggregation mode are shown in
Table 8-1.

Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode Configuration

Item Description Example

Configuring the The slot number of the management control card


Slot No. 5
Ethernet port of in actual use.
the management The slot number of the management control card
Port No. GE1 GE2
control card in actual use.

Version: C/1 303


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode Configuration (Continued)

Item Description Example

Enables or disables the auto negotiation function


Auto negotiate Enable
of the Ethernet port.

The Ethernet port rate. A GE port supports the


Speed 1000M
rate of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s.
Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port. The
Duplex mode includes full duplex mode and half duplex Full duplex
mode. Duplex mode is used by default.

Enables or disables the flow control function of


Flow control Disable
the Ethernet port. Disabled by default

Port address Enables or disables the address learning function


Enable
learning of the Ethernet port. Enabled by default.

Enables or disables the priority function of the


Port priority Enable
Ethernet port. Enabled by default.

The service priority value of the Ethernet port,


Port priority value ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority while 0
0 is the lowest priority. The default setting is 0.

The interface mode of the Ethernet port; includes


SerDes and SGMII. The default value is SerDes.
When the Ethernet port uses the optical module
Interface mode or forced GE electrical module, the SerDes mode SerDes
should be configured. When the Ethernet port
uses the 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbit/s electrical module,
the SMGII mode should be configured.

The AN5006-20 supports two link aggregation


Group ID groups, whose IDs are automatically generated 1
Configuring link
by the system
aggregation
Configure the link aggregation mode of the
group
Mode AN5006-20 according to the network planning of Manual Aggregation
the operator.

The AN5006-20 supports two link aggregation


Group ID groups, whose IDs are automatically generated 1
Configuring by the system
aggregation port Add the member port to the LAG manually
Member Port
according to the network planning of the GE1 GE2
Number
operator.

304 Version: C/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.1.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the manual aggregation mode is shown in Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2 Configuration Flow of Manual Aggregation

8.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management


Control Card

Configure the properties of the GE1 and GE2 ports of the management control card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Ethernet Port to


open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-3.

Version: C/1 305


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control Card - Manual
Aggregation

8.1.6 Configuring the Aggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation
group for the AN5006-20.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet Config→Aggregation→


Aggregation Group to bring up the Aggregation Group tab.

4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add: dialog box
that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 Configuring the Trunking Mode - Manual Aggregation

306 Version: C/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.1.7 Configuring the Trunking Port

Set the GE1 and GE2 ports of the core switch card to the member ports of the
manual aggregation group.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet Config→Aggregation→


Aggregation Port Config to bring up the Aggregation Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 Configuring the Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation

8.1.8 Configuration Result

After the configuration is completed, the member ports in the LAG can transmit the
service packets normally.

8.2 Configuration Example of Static LACP


Aggregation Mode

The following introduces the configuration method of the static LACP aggregation
mode.

Version: C/1 307


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

8.2.1 Configuration Rules

u Two aggregation modes are applicable to the AN5006-20: manual and static
LACP. Users need to configure only either of the two.

u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups.

u An aggregation group may include 2 to 4 member ports.

8.2.2 Network Diagram

Service Planning

The GE1 and GE2 ports of the MCU card on the AN5006-20 form a LACP
aggregation port group.

Network Diagram

The network of the static LACP aggregation is shown in Figure 8-6. Here the MCU
card is taken as an example.

Figure 8-6 Network Diagram for the Static LACP Aggregation

308 Version: C/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Connect the GE1 and GE2 uplink ports of the MCU card with the upper layer switch,
enable the LACP function and add the ports manually to the LAG. The equipment
and the switch determine the link aggregation ports via LACP interaction. When one
of the physical links fails, traffic can be automatically switched to other links in the
aggregation group.

Hardware Configuration

The equipment uses the MCU card to enable LACP port aggregation.

8.2.3 Planning Data

The planning data of configuring the static LACP aggregation mode are shown in
Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Static LACP Aggregation Mode

Item Description Example

The slot number of the management


Slot No. 5
control card in actual use.
The slot number of the management
Port No. GE1 GE2
control card in actual use.
Enables or disables the auto negotiation
Auto negotiate Enable
function of the Ethernet port.

The Ethernet port rate. A GE port


Speed supports the rate of 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000M
Configuring the and 1000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet port of Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port.
the The mode includes full duplex mode and
Duplex Full duplex
management half duplex mode. Duplex mode is used
control card by default.

Enables or disables the flow control


Flow control function of the Ethernet port. Disabled by Disable
default
Enables or disables the address learning
Port address
function of the Ethernet port. Enabled by Enable
learning
default.
Enables or disables the priority function of
Port priority Enable
the Ethernet port. Enabled by default.

Version: C/1 309


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 8-2 Planning Data of Configuring the Static LACP Aggregation Mode (Continued)

Item Description Example

The service priority value of the Ethernet


port, ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest
Port priority value 0
priority while 0 is the lowest priority. The
default setting is 0.

The interface mode of the Ethernet port;


includes SerDes and SGMII. The default
value is SerDes. When the Ethernet port
uses the optical module or forced GE
Interface mode electrical module, the SerDes mode SerDes
should be configured. When the Ethernet
port uses the 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbit/s
electrical module, the SMGII mode
should be configured.

LACP switch Enables the static LACP function. Enable


Configure the system priority of the
Configuring
System priority AN5006-20 according to the network 32768
LACP global
planning of the operator.
parameters
The CPU MAC address of the AN5006-
System ID 00-0a-c2-88-77-44
20
Configure the port number of the link
Port No. aggregation according to the network GE1 GE2
planning of the operator.
Configuring
LACP port Port priority The default setting is 32768. 32768
parameters Operation key The default setting is 0. 1
Configure the port timer type according to
Timer Long Timeout
the network planning of the operator.

The AN5006-20 supports two link


Group ID aggregation groups, whose IDs are 1
Configuring link
automatically generated by the system
aggregation
Configure the link aggregation mode of
group
Mode the AN5006-20 according to the network Static LACP
planning of the operator.

The AN5006-20 supports two link


Group ID aggregation groups, whose IDs are 1
Configuring
automatically generated by the system
aggregation
Add the member GE port to the LAG
port Member Port
manually according to the network GE1 GE2
Number
planning of the operator.

310 Version: C/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

8.2.4 Configuration Flow

The configuration flow of the static LACP aggregation mode is shown in Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACP Aggregation

8.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management


Control Card

Configure the properties of the GE1 and GE2 ports of the management control card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data Service→MCU Ethernet Port to


open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

Version: C/1 311


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control Card - Manual
Aggregation

8.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters

The following introduces how to configure the LACP function of the AN5006-20.
When the LACP function is enabled, the equipment will run the LACP, perform
protocol interaction with the uplink switch and determine the link aggregation ports.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet Config→Aggregation→LACP


Global Config to bring up the LACP Global Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 Configuring the LACP Global Parameters

8.2.7 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters

The following introduces how to configure the LACP parameters of the aggregation
ports.

312 Version: C/1


8 Configuring Link Aggregation

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet Config→Aggregation→LACP


Port Config to bring up the LACP Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-10.

Figure 8-10 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters

8.2.8 Configuring the Aggregation Mode

The following introduces how to configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation
group for the equipment.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet Config→Aggregation→


Aggregation Group to bring up the Aggregation Group tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-11.

Version: C/1 313


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 8-11 Configuring the Trunking Mode - Static LACP Aggregation

8.2.9 Configuring the Aggregation Ports

The following introduces how to set the GE1 and GE2 ports of the management
control card as the member ports of the static LACP aggregation group.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet Config→Aggregation→


Aggregation Port Config to bring up the Aggregation Port Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-12.

Figure 8-12 Configuring the Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation

8.2.10 Configuration Result

After the configuration is completed, the member ports in the LAG can transmit the
service packets normally.

314 Version: C/1


9 Configuring the Power and
Environment Monitoring

The following introduces how to configure the power supply and environment
monitoring for the equipment.

Configuring Environment Monitoring

Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters

Configuring the Charging Mode

Resetting the HCU-20 Card

Enabling the Rectifier Module

Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card

Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card

Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card

Version: C/1 315


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

9.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring

The following introduces how to configure environment monitoring.

9.1.1 Configuration Rules

u An HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card can be bound to only one
threshold profile, while a threshold profile can be bound to multiple ports.

u The alarms are divided into two categories: status alarms and threshold alarms.

4 The status alarms are reported by the HCU-20 card indicating abnormal
state of the system.

4 As for the threshold alarms, users can set the alarm threshold values via
the threshold profile, and the system compares its performance values
with the threshold values to decide whether to report the alarms or clear
the alarms.

u Table 9-1 shows the relationship among the alarm codes, alarm report
threshold ranges and default values, and alarm clearing threshold ranges and
default values.
Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters

Alarm Report Threshold Clearing Alarm Threshold


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Setting Setting

Threshold [0.00,19.90]; the default value is [0.00,19.90]; the default value is 0.


HUM_DOWN %RH
alarm 0.00. 00.
ENV_TEMP_ Threshold [0.00,19.90]; the default value is [0.00,19.90]; the default value is 0.

DOWN alarm 0.00. 00.
Threshold [50.00,109.90]; the default value [50.00,109.90]; the default value is
HUM_OVER %RH
alarm is 90.00. 90.00.
ENV_TEMP_ Threshold [35.00,70.00]; the default value [35.00,70.00]; the default value is

OVER alarm is 55.00. 55.00.
Threshold [230.00,300.00]; the default [230.00,300.00]; the default value
ACVOLOVER V
alarm value is 280.00. is 280.00.
Threshold [130.00,220.00]; the default [130.00,220.00]; the default value
ACVOLDOWN V
alarm value is 170.00. is 170.00.
Threshold [55.00,58.50]; the default value [55.00,58.50]; the default value is
DCVOLOVER V
alarm is 57.00. 57.00.

316 Version: C/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters (Continued)

Alarm Report Threshold Clearing Alarm Threshold


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Setting Setting

Threshold [42.00,50.00]; the default value [42.00,50.00]; the default value is


DCVOLDOWN V
alarm is 45.00. 45.00.
Threshold [10.00,39.90]; the default value [10.00,39.90]; the default value is
OVERCURRE A
alarm is 30.00. 30.00.
Threshold [50.00,69.90]; the default value [50.00,69.90]; the default value is
BDCVLOVER V
alarm is 59.00. 59.00.
Threshold [43.00,49.00]; the default value [43.00,49.00]; the default value is
BDCVLDOWN V
alarm is 45.00. 45.00.
RETEMP- Threshold [40.00,90.00]; the default value [40.00,90.00]; the default value is

OVER alarm is 80.00. 80.00.
BATTERY_
TEMPERA-
Threshold [40.00,89.90]; the default value [40.00,89.90]; the default value is
TURE_OVER_ ℃
alarm is 60.00. 60.00.
THRESHOLD_
ALARM
ARRESTER_ Status
- - -
BREAK alarm
Status
FIRE_ALARM - - -
alarm
DOOR_ Status
- - -
ACCESS alarm
BATTERY_ Status
- - -
FUSE_BREAK alarm
LOAD_FUSE_ Status
- - -
BREAK alarm
AC_
Status
BREAKER_ - - -
alarm
OPEN
RECTIFIER_
Status
MODULE_ - - -
alarm
ALARM
Status
FAN_ALARM - - -
alarm
Status
HEAT_ALARM - - -
alarm
Status
SHAKE - - -
alarm

Version: C/1 317


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters (Continued)

Alarm Report Threshold Clearing Alarm Threshold


Alarm Code Alarm Type Unit
Setting Setting

INFRARED_
Status
DETECT_ - - -
alarm
ALARM
Status
FLOOD - - -
alarm
Status
SMOKE - - -
alarm
AIR_
Status
CONDITION- - - -
alarm
ER_ALARM

AC_POWER_ Status
- - -
FAIL alarm

9.1.2 Planning Data

The following illustrates how to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an
example. See Table 9-2 for the planning data.

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance

Configuration
Item Description
Example

Profile ID Read only. -


Configure it according to actual situation. Maximum
Profile Name length: 20 characters. The acceptable character test1
collection is 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z and the underline.

Configuring the Configure this item according to the planning of the

threshold operator. The options include board and port.. When the

profile Object Class is set to None, the Object Type is null; when
the Object Class is set to other values, set the Object
Object Class Board
Type to the one corresponding to the object class. For the
configuration of the equipment power supply and
environment monitoring, only two options are valid: Board
and Port.

318 Version: C/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)

Configuration
Item Description
Example

Configure it according to actual situation.


If the Object Class is set to Board, the Object Type
Object Type should be set to HCU-20. HCU-20
If the Object Class is set to Port, the Object Type should
be set to LINE-20.
Configure this item according to the planning of the
operator.
If the Object Class is set to Board, the alarm code
options include HUM_DOWN, ENV_TEMP_DOWN,
ACVOLOVER, ACVOLDOWN, DCVOLOVER,
Alarm Code DCVOLDOWN, HUM_OVER, ENV_TEMP_OVER, etc. ACVOLOVER
If the Object Class is set to Port, the alarm code options
includeOVERCURRE, BDCVLOVER, BDCVLDOWN,
RETEMPOVER, BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_OVER_
THRESHOLD_ALARM, BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_
DOWN_THRESHOLD_ALARM, etc.

Configure the item according to the network planning of


the operator. The options are Enable and Disable.
When it is set to Enable, the NMS will deliver the
AlarmThresholdS-
threshold profile parameters configured by the users to Enable
witch
the equipment.
When it is set to Disable, the NMS will deliver the default
settings of the threshold profile to the equipment.

If the alarm type is set to an overhigh performance value,


the NMS will report the alarm when the performance
value of the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is
AlarmReportThres- higher than the set value.
280.00
hold If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value,
the NMS will report the alarm when the performance
value of the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is
lower than the set value.
AlarmReportThre- Read only. The alarm report threshold value should be
[230.00,300.00]
sholdRange set within the alarm report threshold range.

Version: C/1 319


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)

Configuration
Item Description
Example

If the alarm type is set to an overhigh performance value,


the NMS will clear the alarm when the performance value
of the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is lower
than the set value and display the alarm end time. The
value of the ClearingAlarmThreshold should be smaller
than or equal to the value of AlarmReportThreshold in this
case.
If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value,
the NMS will prompt that the alarm is cleared when the
performance value of the HCU-20 card or a port on the
ClearingAlarm- HCU-20 card is higher than the set value. The value of
280.00
Threshold the ClearingAlarmThreshold should be larger than or
equal to the AlarmReportThreshold in this case.
If the AlarmReportThreshold and
ClearingAlarmThreshold are set to the same value, there
is only one threshold value for the alarm. If the alarm type
is set to an overhigh performance value, the alarm will be
cleared when the actual performance value is lower than
the threshold value. If the alarm type is set to an overlow
performance value, the alarm will be cleared when the
actual performance value is higher than the threshold
value.
ClearingAlarmThre- Read only. The clearing alarm threshold value should be
[230.00,300.00]
sholdRange set within the clearing alarm threshold range.

Object Name Select the HCU-20 card or a port on the card. HCU-20
Binding the The name of the existing threshold profile. For a bound
threshold threshold profile, you can select Unbind from the drop-
Profile Name test1
profile down list to unbind it from the HCU-20 card or the port of
the HCU-20 card.

320 Version: C/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.1.3 Configuration Flow

Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance

9.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile

This command is used to configure the alarm codes, the threshold values for
clearing and reporting the alarms of the threshold profile, and enable threshold
alarming by binding the profile to a card or a port.

Note:

A bound threshold profile cannot be deleted unless being unbound first.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Performance Management→Threshold


Profile and Bind→PM Threshold Profile to bring up the PM Threshold
Profile tab.

4. Click the blank area on the left side of the PM Threshold Profile tab, click the
Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears. Then click OK.

Version: C/1 321


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-2.

Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile

9.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile

This command is used to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card or the port
on the HCU-20 card, so as to perform the threshold alarm. The following takes
binding the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an example.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Performance Management→Threshold


Profile and Bind→PM Threshold Profile Bind to bring up the PM Threshold
Profile Bind tab.

4. One the left pane of the tab, select the HCU-20 card or a port on the card, and
then select test1 from the drop-down list of the corresponding profile name on
the right pane.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-3.

Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile

322 Version: C/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.1.6 Configuration End

Configure a threshold profile with the alarm code ACVOLOVER (AC voltage
overhigh), and bind the profile with the HCU-20 card. When the AC voltage of the
card is higher than the set alarm report threshold, the NMS will report the alarm.
When the AC voltage of the card is lower than the set clearing alarm threshold, the
alarm will be cleared.

9.2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring


Parameters

Configure the parameters of the power system for the HCU-20 card to guarantee
normal operation of the power system and ensure reliability of the power supply.
The planning data for configuring the parameters of environment monitoring are
shown in Table 9-3.

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters

Configuration
Item Description
Example

Read-only. The HCU-20 card is managed as a


Slot No. particular card with a dedicated slot number 801
801 in the network management system.

Configure this item according to the planning


Batteryfill back
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
coefficient value
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configure this item according to the planning
Configuring the Batteryfill value of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
environment 999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
monitoring Configure this item according to the planning
Batteryfill limit_current
parameters of the operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to 8.0
value (A)
999.0, and the default value is 8.0 (unit: A).

Configure this item according to the planning


Batteryfill circle value
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
(H)
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

Configure this item according to the planning


Batteryfill time value
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
(H)
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

Version: C/1 323


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)

Configuration
Item Description
Example

Configure this item according to the planning


Battery_fill time
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
stoptime (H)
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).

temperature_ Configure this item according to the planning


compensate_ of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
coefficient 200.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configure this item according to the planning
Temperature Batteryfill
of the operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to 25.0
Basic (℃)
30.0, and the default value is 25.0 (unit: ℃).

Configure this item according to the planning


Volt Fill Adjust Value of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configure this item according to the planning
Temperature Fill Adjust
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to 0.0
Value
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
Configure this item according to the planning
Communte float
of the operator. The value ranges from 45.0 to 54.0
charge volt (V)
57.0, and the default value is 54.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Communte equal
of the operator. The value ranges from 52.0 to 55.0
charge volt (V)
58.5, and the default value is 55.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Communte num (Unit) of the operator. The value ranges from 0 to 12, 2
and the default value is 2 (unit: Unit).

Configure this item according to the planning


of the operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to
Battery Capacity (AH) 100.0
999.0, and the default value is 100.0 (unit:
AH).

Configure this item according to the planning


Sound Alarm Switch of the operator. Two options are available: close
"open" and "close".

Configure this item according to the planning


Battery switch volt (V) of the operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to 43.0
47.0, and the default value is 43.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Load switch volt (V) of the operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to 45.0
50.0, and the default value is 45.0 (unit: V).

324 Version: C/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)

Configuration
Item Description
Example

Configure this item according to the planning


Communte limit_
of the operator. The value ranges from 2.0 to 11.0
current value (A)
50.0, and the default value is 11.0 (unit: A).

Configure this item according to the planning


Discharge turn EQ
of the operator. The value ranges from 43.0 to 48.0
voltage (V)
51.0, and the default value is 48.0 (unit: V).

Configure this item according to the planning


Discharge turn EQ
of the operator. The value ranges from 30.0 to 30.0
time (min)
60.0, and the default value is 30.0 (unit: min).

Configure this item according to the planning


Discharge turn EQ
of the operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to 60.0
capacity (%)
90.0, and the default value is 60.0 (unit: %).

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→HCU Para Config to


open the HCU Para Config tab.

4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-4.

Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters

9.3 Configuring the Charging Mode

Configure the charging mode for the storage battery using the HCU-20 card.

Version: C/1 325


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Charging mode to


bring up the Charging mode tab.

4. Select the desired charging mode.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode

9.4 Resetting the HCU-20 Card

The following introduces how to reset the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System Control→Reset to bring up the


Reset tab. Select reset card 801 from the drop-down list of the Slot No..

4. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card

326 Version: C/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.5 Enabling the Rectifier Module

The following introduces how to enable the rectifier module.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→Rectifier module


enable to bring up the Rectifier module enable tab.

4. Double-click the Module No. field, fill in the number of the rectifier module to be
configured, and then select Enable or Disable.

5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7 Enabling the Rectifier Module

9.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-


20 Card

The following introduces how to view the instant performance of the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment View, and select Current
Performance from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Current
Performance tab. Then you can check the instant performance of the current
HCU card. See Figure 9-8.

Version: C/1 327


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure 9-8 Checking the Instant Performance of the HCU Card

9.7 Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card

The following introduces how to view the current alarms of the HCU-20 card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment Device, and select Current
Alarm from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Current Alarm tab.
Then you can check the alarms currently existing in the HCU card. See
Figure 9-9.

Figure 9-9 Viewing the Current Alarms of the HCU Card

328 Version: C/1


9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring

9.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20


Card

The following introduces the procedure to view the alarm history of the HCU-20
card.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment View, and select Alarm History
from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Alarm History tab. Then
you can check the alarm history of the HCU card. See Figure 9-10.

Figure 9-10 Checking the Alarm History of the HCU Card

Version: C/1 329


10 Test Function

The following introduces the subscriber line test function and the Ping test function
of the equipment.

Subscriber Internal Line Test

Subscriber External Line Test

Ping Test

330 Version: C/1


10 Test Function

10.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test

The following introduces how to configure the subscriber internal line test.

10.1.1 Test Rules

The tests can be divided into forcible and non-forcible tests. A forcible test will be
performed even when the user is in conversation, and the conversation will be
interrupted during the test. A non-forcible test will not be performed when the user is
in conversation. Usually a non-forcible test is recommended.

10.1.2 Signal Flow

The signal flow of the subscriber internal line test is shown in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test

The signal flow in the subscriber internal line test is described as follows.

1. The UNM2000 delivers the internal line test command to the management
control card.

2. The management control card receives the test command from the network
management system and checks the command parameters, including the
parameter range, and whether the line card is present and is the service card
supporting the voice function. If no fault exists, the management control card
will send the test command to the corresponding line card, and meanwhile
send the feedback information to the UNM2000, indicating that the test
command is successfully delivered.

3. Upon receiving the test command, the line card performs the line test. Each
time when it completes a port test, the line card will report to the management
control card that the test is completed (excluding the test result).

Version: C/1 331


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

10.1.3 Test Procedure

Figure 10-2 shows the flow chart for the subscriber internal line test.

Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test

10.1.4 Configuring the Subscriber Internal Line Test

The internal line test can be used to check whether the POTS card is normal and
facilitate fault isolation. Here we take Port 1 of the POTS card in Slot 4 as an
example.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→112 Test to bring up


the 112 Test tab.

4. Select the line with the port number 1, and then select Inline Test from the
drop-down list of the Test Mode field, and no force test from the Test Type
field.

5. Select the current line, and click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to
apply the configuration to the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-3.

332 Version: C/1


10 Test Function

Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test

10.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result

Check the result of the subscriber internal line test.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Inline Test to open the
Inline Test tab.

4. In the Switch Object pane, select POTS64[1], and then select Port 1. The
equipment reads the configuration, as shown in Figure 10-4.

Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result

10.1.6 Test Completed

The Test State has three options:

u completed: The test is completed.

u testing: The test is in progress.

u waiting: The UNM2000 has not yet issued the test command.

Version: C/1 333


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Below are the two test results:

u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.

u Refused: The test fails. The Refuse Reason is that the port is being tested or is
in use.

The parameters like Signal Tone State, Feeder Voltage State, and Loop Current
State are in either of the two states: normal or abnormal.

10.2 Subscriber External Line Test

The following introduces how to configure the subscriber external line test.

10.2.1 Test Rules

The tests can be divided into forcible and non-forcible tests. A forcible test will be
performed even when the user is in conversation, and the conversation will be
interrupted during the test. A non-forcible test will not be performed when the user is
in conversation. Usually a non-forcible test is recommended.

10.2.2 Signal Flow

Figure 10-5 shows the signal flow in the subscriber external line test.

Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test

The signal flow in the subscriber external line test is described as follows.

1. The UNM2000 delivers the external line test command to the management
control card.

334 Version: C/1


10 Test Function

2. The management control card receives the test command from the network
management system and checks the command parameters, including the
parameter range, and whether the line card is present and is the service card
supporting the voice function. If no fault exists, the management control card
will send the test command to the corresponding line card, and meanwhile
send the feedback information to the UNM2000, indicating that the test
command is successfully delivered.

3. Upon receiving the test command, the line card performs the line test. Each
time when it completes a port test, the line card will report to the management
control card that the test is completed (excluding the test result).

10.2.3 Test Procedure

Figure 10-6 shows the flow of subscriber external line test.

Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test

10.2.4 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test

When a fault occurs in the subscriber telephone line, the external line test can be
implemented to check whether the physical connection of the POTS card is normal
and facilitate fault isolation. Here we take Port 1 of the POTS card in Slot 1 as an
example.

Version: C/1 335


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Config→112 Test to bring up


the 112 Test tab.

4. Click the Add button in the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add.
dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
configuration entry.

5. Double-click the Test Mode field and select OutLine Test from the drop-down
list.

6. Double-click the Test Type field and select no force test from the drop-down
list.

7. Click the Create on Device button in the toolbar to apply the configuration to
the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-7.

Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test

10.2.5 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result

Check the 112 external line test result.

Procedure

1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE


manager.

2. Select Configuration→Local Service Configuration from the menu bar to


bring up the Local Service Config tab.

3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get Information→Outline Test to open


the Outline Test tab.

336 Version: C/1


10 Test Function

4. In the Switch Object pane, select POTS64[1], and then select Port 1. The
equipment reads the configuration, as shown in Figure 10-8.

Figure 10-8 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result

10.2.6 Test Completed

The Test State has three options:

u completed: The test is completed.

u testing: The test is in progress.

u waiting: The UNM2000 has not yet issued the test command.

Below are the two test results:

u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.

u Refused: The test fails. The Refuse Reason is that the port is being tested or is
in use.

The Port Status and the corresponding fault causes are described as follows:

u normal: The subscriber line is connected with the phone.

u line break: The subscriber line is not connected with the phone and the port
status is abnormal.

u shorted: The subscriber line A is connected with the subscriber line B, and the
port status is abnormal.

u poor insulation: The subscriber line is grounded, and the port is in abnormal
status.

u Not hung up: The telephone is not hung up, and the port status is abnormal.

u Line interfere: The subscriber lines A and B are connected with the battery, and
the port status is abnormal.

Version: C/1 337


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

10.3 Ping Test

The following introduces the purpose and procedures of the Ping test.

10.3.1 Test Purpose

The Ping test is used to check the network connectivity. The AN5006-20 transmits
the ICMP echo request message to the destination IP address, and reports whether
it has received the desired ICMP echo reply. It can be learned from the test result
whether two network devices are well connected as well as the information such as
packet loss rate and network delay.

10.3.2 Ping Test

The following introduces how to implement the Ping test.

Procedure

1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select System→


Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Test Task→VOIP PING Task, and click Create to open
the Create VOIP PING Task dialog box.

3. In the Parameter Settings group box, enter the destination IP address in the
Destination IP text box, as shown in Figure 10-9.

338 Version: C/1


10 Test Function

Figure 10-9 Configuring the Ping Test Parameters

Note:

See Table 10-1 for Ping test parameters.

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters

Parameter Description

Select this check box and set the quantity of Tx packets in the text box.
-n
The value ranges from 0 to 4 294 967 295 and the default value is 4.

Select this check box and set the timeout interval of the waiting period
-w in the text box. The value ranges from 0 to 4 294 967 295 and the
default value is 4000; unit: ms.
Select this check box and set the size of the packet in the text box (unit:
-l
byte). The value ranges from 0 to 65 500 and the default value is 32.

Select this check box and set the TTL value in the text box. The value
-i
ranges from 1 to 255 and the default value is 128.

Version: C/1 339


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description

Select this check box and set the TOS value in the text box. The value
-v
ranges from 0 to 255 and the default value is 0.

Select this check box and set the hop count of the routers sending and
-r receiving packets in the text box. The value ranges from 1 to 9 and the
default value is 1.
Select this check box and set the timeslot of the route hop count in the
-s text box. It is similar to -r, but does not record the route via which the
packet returns. The value ranges from 1 to 4, and the default value is 1.

Select this check box and the user can ping the designated computer
-t
until pressing down Ctrl + C to terminate.
-a Select this check box to resolve the address to the host name.
Select this check box to set "no-segmentation" of the data packet, so
-f
that the packet will not be segmented by gateway of the route.

Select this check box to list the route of the packet based on the
designated computer in the "Host IP" group box. Consecutive
-j
computers can be separated by intermediate gateways (loose source
route). Up to 9 host IP addresses can be configured.

Select this check box to list the route of the packet based on the
designated computer in the "Host IP" group box. Consecutive
-k
computers cannot be separated by the intermediate gateway (route
strict source) Up to 9 host IP addresses can be configured.

4. Click OK and return to the VOIP PING Test window.

5. Click Execute Now and the test result will be displayed in the right pane, as
shown in Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-10 Ping Test

10.3.3 Viewing the Test Result

After the Ping test is completed, the test result will be displayed in the right pane of
the VOIP PING Task window, and you can check the following items.

340 Version: C/1


10 Test Function

Table 10-2 Ping Test Result

Item Description

Object Info The equipment to execute the Ping command.

Destination IP The IP address of the destination host


Send Message Number The number of ICMP packets transmitted by the equipment

Number of Received
The number of ICMP packets received by the equipment
Packets
The maximum interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted
Maximum Delay
and received
The minimum interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and
Minimum Delay
received
The average interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and
Average Delay Time
received
The ratio of the lost data packets to the total number of data
Packet Loss Rate
packets transmitted

Version: C/1 341


Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

The following introduces the functions and procedures of the FTP operations.

A.1 Function Overview

Connect the computer with the equipment using the network cable, and set up the
FTP server end on the computer; that is, install the WFTP software. During
equipment upgrade, the equipment obtains the upgrade package from the FTP
server in the FTP mode. During equipment backup, the equipment exports the
backup files to the FTP server end in the FTP mode.

A.2 Procedure

The following uses an example to describe how to use the WFTP software. Create
an FTP user with the user name 1 and the password 1, and set the path for saving
the upgrade / backup package to d:\ftp.

Procedure

1. At the FTP server end, set the path for saving the upgrade / backup package to
d:\ftp.

2. Open the WFTP window, as shown in Figure A-1.

342 Version: C/1


Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

Figure A -1 Opening the WFTP Software

3. Click Security→Users/Rights in the menu bar to start user configuration, as


shown in Figure A-2.

Figure A -2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI

4. In the User/Rights Security Dialog window that appears, click the New User
button to create a new FTP user. This user account will be used in upgrading
and backup later on. Enter the username 1, as shown in Figure A-3.

Version: C/1 343


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Note:

Click the Delete button to delete an existing user, or select an existing


user and click the Change Password button to modify the user’s
password.

Figure A -3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1

5. Click the OK button, enter the password 1, and click OK to create a new user,
as shown in Figure A-4.

Figure A -4 Entering User Password 1

344 Version: C/1


Appendix A FTP Operation Guide

6. Enter the directory where the upgrade package / backup package is saved in
the Home Directory field in the User/Rights Security Dialog window. Type d:
\ftp according to the directory setting in Step1, as shown in Figure A-5.

Figure A -5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package

7. Click the Done button to complete the configuration.

8. Click Logging→Log options in the No log file open window to set the log
function of the WFTP tool, as shown in Figure A-6.

Figure A -6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool

9. Select all the check boxes except Winsock Calls in the Logging Options
window, as shown in Figure A-7.

Version: C/1 345


AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device GPON Configuration Guide

Figure A -7 Logging Options

10. Click the OK button to display the logs. Users can isolate faults using the log
information and determine whether the "gets" or "puts" operation is successful
according to the Log displayed in the WFTP window.

Now the WFTP configuration is completed.

346 Version: C/1


Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.

Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company

To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.

Documentation Name
Code and Version

Usage of the product documentation:


1. How often do you use the documentation?
□ Frequently □ Rarely □ Never □ Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
□ in starting up a project □ in installing the product □ in daily maintenance □ in trouble
shooting □ Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
□ 100% □ 80% □ 50% □ 0% □ Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
□ Satisfied □ Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
□ Print edition □ Electronic edition □ Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
□ Very □ Somewhat □ Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
□ Good □ Normal □ Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
□ Yes (Please give an example)
□ No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?

8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?

9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)

□ Practical □ Unpractical (your advice)

10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?


□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:

Satisfied (please specify)

Unsatisfied (please specify)

12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:

Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
edit@fiberhome.com

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen